2 0 2 5 O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features
and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment that
are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that
are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements
to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install
them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC
shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important
features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio
Instruction Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the
website on the back cover.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, 12 Volt Battery Jump
Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the
Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program
is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by
FCA US LLC. Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s
Manual for further information.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which
are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................... 8
1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE.............................................................15
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL................................. 125
3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING..........................................................................150
4
5 MULTIMEDIA........................................................................................................... 211
5
6 SAFETY ................................................................................................................. 236
6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY.............................................................................. 283
7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE................................................................ 297
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................... 362
9
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE............................................................................... 369
10
11 INDEX...................................................................................................................... 372
11
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY....................................................... 9
ROLLOVER WARNING............................................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 10
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY ....................................15
Battery Conditioning...................................... 16
Power Box — If Equipped............................... 16
Regenerative Braking System (RBS)............ 21
E-Select Mode................................................22
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION ............ 22
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet..............................22
AC Level 1 Charging (120 Volt, 12 Amp)......22
AC Level 2 Charging (240 Volt, 40 Amp)...... 30
Charging Times.............................................. 31
Vehicle Charge Indicators..............................31
Hybrid Electric Pages.....................................32
KEYS ................................................................... 35
Key Fob...........................................................35
SENTRY KEY........................................................ 37
IGNITION SWITCH................................................38
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition.......................38
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition — Hybrid
Only............................................................39
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED......................... 41
How To Use Remote Start..............................41
To Exit Remote Start Mode............................41
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped................................................42
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped................................................... 42
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped........................... 42
Remote Start Cancel Message..................... 42
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (HYBRID
ONLY).............................................................. 43
How To Use Remote Start............................. 43
To Enter Remote Start Mode.........................43
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle................................... 43
Scheduled Cabin Conditioning (SCC)........... 43
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.... 45
To Arm The System ....................................... 45
To Disarm The System ..................................45
Rearming Of The System...............................45
Security System Manual Override................ 45
DOORS ................................................................46
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ................. 46
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped)..............................................46
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ...........48
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors................................................ 48
Front Door Removal ......................................49
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)...... 52
Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped................. 53
Half-Door Installation — If Equipped.............55
STEERING WHEEL...............................................60
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column.................60
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped..........60
SEATS ..................................................................61
Power Adjustment Front Seats — If
Equipped................................................... 61
Manual Adjustment Front Seats — If
Equipped................................................... 62
Manual Adjustment Rear Seats....................63
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door
Models.......................................................65
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped..................66
Unfolding The Rear Armrest — Hybrid Only.. 66
Heated Seats — If Equipped..........................67
Head Restraints ............................................67
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION...................... 69
Introducing Voice Recognition...................... 69
Basic Voice Commands.................................69
Get Started.....................................................69
Additional Information...................................70
MIRRORS ............................................................70
Inside Rearview Mirror.................................. 70
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ............................ 70
Outside Mirrors ............................................. 71
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If
Equipped....................................................71
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ........................ 71
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 71
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED......................72
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®...............................................72
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels......... 72
2
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device........... 72
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener..............................................72
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device...............................73
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................73
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming....... 74
Security........................................................... 74
Troubleshooting Tips......................................74
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..............................................75
Headlight Switch............................................75
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped .................................................. 75
High/Low Beam Switch ................................ 76
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped ...............................76
Flash-To-Pass .................................................76
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped.............76
Lights-On Reminder....................................... 76
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped......................76
Turn Signals....................................................77
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............... 77
INTERIOR LIGHTS................................................77
Interior Courtesy Lights................................. 77
Dimmer Control..............................................77
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ............. 78
Windshield Wiper Operation......................... 78
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If
Equipped .................................................. 79
CLIMATE CONTROLS...........................................79
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions........................................... 79
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped................................................ 81
Climate Voice Commands ............................ 81
Operating Tips ...............................................82
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT.............. 83
Storage........................................................... 83
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped................84
USB/AUX Control............................................84
Power Outlets ................................................85
Power Inverter — If Equipped ....................... 86
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ................. 86
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ...................88
Auto-Down Feature ....................................... 88
Window Lockout Switch................................ 88
Wind Buffeting .............................................. 88
WRANGLER TOPS................................................89
Provided Tools................................................89
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
Position......................................................89
Raising The Soft Top......................................99
Removing The Soft Top............................... 102
Installing The Soft Top.................................103
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal............... 105
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation...........108
Removing The Hard Top.............................. 109
Installing The Hard Top............................... 111
Sunrider® For Hard Top.............................. 111
Power Sliding Top — If Equipped.................113
DOOR FRAME....................................................116
Door Frame Removal...................................117
Door Frame Installation Four Door
Models — If Equipped.............................117
Door Frame Installation Two Door
Models — If Equipped.............................118
FOLDING WINDSHIELD ....................................119
Lowering The Windshield............................ 119
Raising The Windshield...............................121
HOOD ................................................................121
Opening The Hood.......................................121
Closing The Hood........................................ 122
REAR SWING GATE .......................................... 122
Cargo Area Features................................... 123
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ...........124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...................................125
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................ 126
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — HYBRID.................. 128
Instrument Cluster Descriptions — Hybrid.129
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.....................129
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls........................................... 129
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped................. 131
Electric Mode Temporarily Unavailable...... 131
Display And Messages................................ 133
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items....................................................... 134
3
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load
Reduction Actions — If Equipped...........138
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES................ 139
Red Warning Lights..................................... 139
Yellow Warning Lights..................................142
Yellow Indicator Lights.................................145
Green Indicator Lights.................................146
White Indicator Lights..................................147
Blue Indicator Lights................................... 148
Gray Indicator Lights................................... 148
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .....148
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity.......................................... 148
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .......................149
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE VEHICLE................................... 150
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ......... 150
Automatic Transmission..............................150
Normal Starting .......................................... 150
AutoPark.......................................................151
Extended Park Starting............................... 152
If Engine Fails To Start ............................... 152
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F
Or −30°C)............................................... 153
After Starting............................................... 153
STARTING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID................. 153
Normal Starting........................................... 153
After Starting............................................... 154
To Turn Off The Vehicle Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button................................154
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......154
PARKING BRAKE ..............................................154
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ......155
Shifting.........................................................156
Downshifting................................................156
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................ 157
Ignition Park Interlock................................. 158
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System .........................................158
8–Speed Automatic Transmission............. 158
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION................... 161
Four-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped 161
Five-Position Transfer Case ........................163
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped .............. 165
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear — If
Equipped.................................................165
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only — If
Equipped.................................................166
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only For High
Speed Operation — If Equipped.............166
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If
Equipped ................................................167
Off Road+ — If Equipped............................. 168
DUAL MODE EXHAUST......................................168
WINCH USAGE — RUBICON (IF EQUIPPED)..... 169
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch..169
Understanding The Features Of Your
Winch...................................................... 169
Winch Accessories ......................................170
Operating Your Winch .................................170
Rigging Techniques .....................................175
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING....... 175
(IF EQUIPPED)....................................................176
Start/Stop Mode..........................................176
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop...................................................176
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode........................................................177
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System.....................................................177
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System.....................................................178
System Malfunction.....................................178
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)...................178
Start/Stop Mode..........................................178
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop.................................................. 179
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode....................................................... 179
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System.....................................................179
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System.................................................... 180
System Malfunction.................................... 180
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED..180
Cruise Control.............................................. 180
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).....................181
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ................................................... 188
4
ParkSense Sensors..................................... 188
ParkSense Warning Display........................189
ParkSense Display.......................................189
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense............ 191
Service The ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System..........................................191
Cleaning The ParkSense System................192
ParkSense System Usage Precautions...... 192
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA............... 192
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.................193
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................ 194
Fuel Filler Cap ............................................. 194
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ..................195
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID...............195
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................. 197
VEHICLE LOADING ........................................... 198
Certification Label....................................... 198
TRAILER TOWING..............................................199
Common Towing Definitions....................... 199
Trailer Hitch Classification.......................... 200
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........................200
Trailer And Tongue Weight ......................... 200
Towing Requirements..................................201
Towing Tips.................................................. 202
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) .............................................203
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle.....................................................203
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel
Drive Models...........................................203
DRIVING TIPS....................................................205
On-Road Driving Tips...................................205
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................. 205
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................211
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................211
UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................................... 211
Customer Programmable Features............ 211
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 230
Radio Operation.......................................... 230
Media Mode.................................................230
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....230
Regulatory And Safety Information............ 230
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ...................231
Vehicle Dynamics........................................ 231
Accessory Gauge ........................................ 231
Pitch & Roll ..................................................231
TrailCam — If Equipped............................... 232
Trail Recording — If Equipped..................... 232
ADVENTURE GUIDES — IF EQUIPPED..............233
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES............................................236
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 236
Audible Pedestrian Warning System - If
Equipped.................................................236
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) — If
Equipped................................................. 237
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .....237
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS......................... 243
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped ................................................ 243
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped........................ 246
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . 248
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 252
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ..... 252
Important Safety Precautions.....................252
Seat Belt Systems ...................................... 252
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).....257
Child Restraints .......................................... 269
SAFETY TIPS .................................................... 280
Transporting Passengers............................ 280
Transporting Pets ....................................... 280
Connected Vehicles.....................................280
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .............................................280
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle..................... 281
Exhaust Gas.................................................281
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .......................282
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 283
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....283
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .......................286
Preparations For Jacking ........................... 286
Jack Location ..............................................286
Spare Tire Removal .................................... 287
Jacking Instructions ....................................287
JUMP STARTING ...............................................289
Preparations For Jump Start...................... 290
5
Jump Starting Procedure............................ 291
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 292
MANUAL PARK RELEASE..................................293
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE.............................294
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ....................... 294
Four–Wheel Drive Models.......................... 295
Without The Key Fob................................... 295
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ....... 295
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)............................................296
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)........................296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING.................................. 297
Maintenance Plan — 2.0L Gas, Hybrid
and 3.6L Gas.......................................... 297
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................302
2.0L Engine..................................................302
2.0L Hybrid Engine......................................303
3.6L Engine..................................................304
Checking Oil Level....................................... 305
Adding Washer Fluid .................................. 305
Maintenance-Free Battery ......................... 305
Pressure Washing....................................... 306
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE.................................. 306
Engine Oil ....................................................306
Engine Oil Filter ...........................................307
Engine Air Cleaner Filter..............................307
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................. 308
Air Conditioner Maintenance......................308
Body Lubrication .........................................310
Windshield Wiper Blades ........................... 310
Exhaust System .......................................... 312
Cooling System............................................ 313
Brake System ..............................................316
Front/Rear Axle Fluid...................................316
Transfer Case .............................................. 317
Manual Transmission — If Equipped...........317
— If Equipped............................................... 317
Fuses ........................................................... 318
Bulb Replacement ......................................335
TIRES.................................................................338
Tire Safety Information ...............................338
Tires — General Information ...................... 344
Tire Types..................................................... 347
Spare Tires — If Equipped...........................348
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...................... 349
Snow Traction Devices ............................... 350
Tire Rotation Recommendations ...............351
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...............352
Treadwear.................................................... 352
Traction Grades........................................... 352
Temperature Grades................................... 353
STORING THE VEHICLE ................................... 353
STORING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID (IF
EQUIPPED)................................................... 354
BODYWORK.......................................................354
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........354
Body And Underbody Maintenance............355
Preserving The Bodywork........................... 355
INTERIORS ....................................................... 356
Carpet Safety Information...........................356
Carpet Removal........................................... 357
Seats And Fabric Parts................................360
Plastic And Coated Parts............................ 360
Leather Surfaces.........................................360
Glass Surfaces ............................................361
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)....... 362
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................ 362
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . 362
Torque Specifications..................................362
FUEL REQUIREMENTS......................................363
2.0L Engine..................................................363
3.6L Engine..................................................363
Reformulated Gasoline .............................. 363
Materials Added To Fuel .............................363
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...................... 363
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles...................................................364
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.... 364
MMT In Gasoline......................................... 364
Fuel System Cautions..................................364
FLUID CAPACITIES ........................................... 365
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............................366
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS............ 366
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS...........367
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE..................................369
FCA US LLC Customer Center..................... 369
FCA Canada Customer Care....................... 369
Mexico..........................................................369
6
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands..............369
Roadside Assistance...................................369
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)............. 370
Service Contract.......................................... 370
Warranty Information.................................. 370
Ordering and Accessing Additional
Owner’s Information...............................370
Change Of Ownership Or Address...............371
General Information.....................................371
7
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for
on-road use only. It is not intended for rugged off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this
Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle
to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision
ð
page 205.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details
of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
8 INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating
procedures that could result in a colli-
sion, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your vehi-
cle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionali-
ty.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while
some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
INTRODUCTION 9
1
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to
be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when
operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
ð
page 139.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
ð
page 139
Brake Warning Light
ð
page 140
Battery Charge Warning Light
ð
page 140
Red Warning Lights
Door Open Warning Light
ð
page 140
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
ð
page 140
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
ð
page 141
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 141
Hood Open Warning Light
ð
page 141
Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Service Warning Light
ð
page 141
Oil Pressure Warning Light
ð
page 141
Oil Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 141
10 INTRODUCTION
Red Warning Lights
Plug Status Fault Warning Light
ð
page 141
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
ð
page 142
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
ð
page 142
Torque Limited Warning Light
ð
page 142
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 142
Vehicle Security Warning Light
ð
page 142
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
ð
page 142
Yellow Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
ð
page 143
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
ð
page 143
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
ð
page 143
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
ð
page 143
Low Fuel Warning Light
ð
page 143
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
ð
page 143
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
ð
page 143
Service 4WD Warning Light
ð
page 144
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light
ð
page 144
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
ð
page 144
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
ð
page 144
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
ð
page 144
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
ð
page 144
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Fault Warning Light
ð
page 145
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
ð
page 144
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light
ð
page 145
4WD Low Indicator Light
ð
page 145
4WD Part Time Indicator Light
ð
page 145
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
ð
page 145
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
ð
page 145
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
ð
page 145
Neutral Indicator Light
ð
page 145
Off Road+ Indicator Light
ð
page 146
12 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Indicator Lights
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
ð
page 146
Sway Bar Indicator Light
ð
page 146
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator
Light
ð
page 146
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
ð
page 146
4WD Auto Indicator Light
ð
page 146
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
ð
page 146
Front Fog Indicator Light
ð
page 146
Green Indicator Lights
Max Regeneration Indicator Light
ð
page 146
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
ð
page 146
Plug Status Indicator Light
ð
page 146
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
ð
page 147
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
ð
page 147
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
ð
page 146
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
ð
page 147
INTRODUCTION 13
1
White Indicator Lights
2WD High Indicator Light
ð
page 147
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
ð
page 147
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
ð
page 147
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
ð
page 148
White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
ð
page 148
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
ð
page 148
Gray Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
ð
page 148
14 INTRODUCTION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high voltage
battery that is used to power the electric powertrain
systems and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system.
The high voltage battery is located under the rear seat.
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits:
● Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other
types of rechargeable batteries of the same size.
● Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only
lose approximately three percent of their charge per
month.
● Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means
that you do not have to completely discharge them
before recharging, as with some other batteries.
● Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and
discharged thousands of times.
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
The high voltage battery service disconnect is located
under the access panel, under the left side rear seat.
Only a qualified service technician should access the
high voltage battery service disconnect.
If your vehicle requires high voltage battery service, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
● Never try to remove the high voltage battery
service disconnect. The high voltage battery
service disconnect is used when your vehicle
requires service by a qualified technician at
an authorized dealership. Failure to follow this
warning can result in electrical shock, toxic
emissions, fire, and other hazards which can
cause death or serious injury including severe
burns, respiratory injuries, and blindness.
● The high voltage battery and battery case have
no parts that you or an unqualified technician
can service. Under no circumstances should you
or an unqualified technician open, disassemble,
penetrate, or tamper with the high voltage battery,
battery case, their cables, or connectors. Damage
to these components can result in electrical
shock, toxic emissions, fire, and other hazards
which can cause death or serious injury including
severe burns, respiratory injuries, and blindness.
You should take the vehicle to an authorized
dealership for any service or maintenance on
these high voltage components.
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to last
the life of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
information on the disposal of the battery if it should
require replacement.
WARNING!
Your vehicle contains a sealed Lithium-ion high
voltage battery. If the battery is disposed of
improperly, there is a risk of electrical shock and toxic
emissions which can cause severe burns, respiratory
injuries, fires, and other hazards resulting in serious
injury or death.
General Information
The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery
Management system that is designed to:
● Ensure safe operation
● Maximize driving range
● Maximize the life expectancy of the high voltage
battery
NOTE:
During vehicle start up and shut down, a clicking noise
may be heard from within the vehicle. When the vehicle
is preparing to start, the high voltage battery contactors
inside the battery are closed to make the stored
electricity inside available for vehicle use. After the
vehicle is shut down, the contactors open, to electrically
isolate the battery from other vehicle systems. The
clicking noise is the sound of these contactors as they
open and close during normal operation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
WARNING!
In the event of a collision:
● If your vehicle is still drivable, pull off to the
side of the road when safe to do so, place
the transmission in the PARK position, apply the
parking brake, and turn the vehicle off.
● Beware of any exposed high-voltage parts or
cables. To avoid electrical shock which can result
in serious injury or death, never touch wiring,
connectors, and other high-voltage parts, such as
the inverter unit and the Lithium-ion battery.
● Leaks or damage to the Lithium-ion battery may
result in a fire and toxic emissions which can
cause severe burns, respiratory injuries, and other
serious injuries or death. If you discover these
leaks, contact emergency services immediately.
Since the fluid leak may be Lithium Manganate
from the Lithium-ion battery, never touch the fluid
leak inside or outside of the vehicle. If the fluid
contacts your skin or eyes, wash these areas
immediately with a large amount of water and
obtain immediate medical attention to help avoid
serious injury.
● If a fire occurs in your vehicle, leave the vehicle as
soon as possible and contact emergency services.
● If you are not able to safely assess the vehicle due
to vehicle damage, do not touch the vehicle. Leave
the vehicle and contact emergency services.
Advise first responders that this is a hybrid-electric
vehicle.
● In the event of an accident that requires bodywork,
refer to an authorized dealership.
BATTERY CONDITIONING
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in.
If the ambient temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below at
vehicle shut down, the instrument cluster will display
the message “Plug In Vehicle To Condition Battery”.
If the battery temperature is below -22°F (-30°C), or
131°F (55°C) or above, the vehicle will NOT start:
● If the vehicle is plugged in at these battery
temperatures, the instrument cluster will display
the message “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery
Conditioning Needed”.
● If the vehicle is not plugged in at these battery
temperatures, the “Plug In Vehicle To Condition
Battery” will be shown in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
● When the “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery
Conditioning Needed” message is displayed, keep
the ignition in the RUN position for the battery to
recover. Place the ignition back in the OFF position
when the message disappears, and then start the
vehicle. When this message is displayed, do not
operate any air conditioning controls.
● Under these high or low temperatures, while the
vehicle is plugged in and the ignition is in the OFF
position, the vehicle may “wake up” to precondition
the high voltage battery for use.
● It is recommended that the vehicle be plugged in
overnight when possible to maximize the electric
range of the vehicle.
● It is recommended that the high voltage battery not
be exposed to direct sunlight in high temperature
environments while the vehicle is OFF. This may
lower the life of the battery.
The messages will only be displayed when the ignition
is in the RUN position and the high voltage battery is
not ready to provide propulsion power. The messages
will also display if there was a failed attempt to
achieve READY state when the high voltage battery cell
temperatures were either too cold, or too hot.
POWER BOX — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
This publication contains important instructions and
warnings that should be followed during the use of
the Power Box feature. Before using the Power Box,
make sure to check the equipment for moisture or
water damage. Failure to follow these warnings and
instructions can result in electrical shock and fire
which can cause death or serious injury.
Refer to the warning labels on the side of the Power
Box and on the charging cables.
● The engine may idle during use to power the
outlets. A running engine emits exhaust containing
carbon monoxide, which can cause injury or death
if inhaled. Never use in closed or confined spaces.
● Never use the Power Box, vehicle charging port,
or 3-pin outlet power plug while in use with wet
hands. Always handle the Power Box with dry
hands. Never use or allow the Power Box to get
(Continued)
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
wet. Do not use it in wet or damp locations, and
do not submerge it in water. Only use electrical
equipment with a waterproof function/rating, or
use it in a waterproof environment. Do not use in
environments with rain or high humidity.
● Never insert metal objects into the Power Box
connectors, or in the vehicle charging port, as this
action can damage the connection terminals or
cause electric shock resulting in injury or death.
● Never disassemble the Power Box.
● Do not overload electrical extension cords plugged
into the Power Box outlet.
● If there is a risk of lightning, do not use the Power
Box system outside the vehicle.
● When the Power Box is in operation, the vehicle’s
cooling fan can operate automatically even if the
vehicle is turned off. Do not put your hands near
the cooling fan while it is operating.
● Never use electrical equipment that requires
a continuous power supply, such as medical
equipment. The power supply may be interrupted
depending on the vehicle’s condition.
● Do not use the Power Box to back feed your
house or home electrical system under any
circumstance.
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the P
o
w
er Bo
x.
The Power Box enables the transfer of energy from the
vehicle's High Voltage Battery to power 120V AC items
that may typically be used outdoors.
Power Box
Please read all Cautions and Safety procedures within
these Power Box instructions before operating.
Power Box
1 — Power Outlet
2 — Power Indicator Light
3 — Vehicle Indicator Light
4 — AC On Button
5 — USB-C Port
NOTE:
● The USB-C port is used to charge the Power Box
internal battery and does not offer external charging
capabilities.
● The Power Box cannot be used to charge other
vehicles.
The energy to support the loads are provided by the
High Voltage Battery in the vehicle. The inverter in
the vehicle will convert the direct current (DC) power
from the High Voltage Battery to alternating current (AC)
power to support the loads.
Getting Started
The Power Box provides maximum flexibility using the
high voltage system under three modes of operation:
Battery Mode
● In Battery Mode, the High Voltage Battery will provide
power to the Power Box until depleted. A minimum
battery charge is required to use this mode.
● Conditions where Battery Mode may be desired: An
overnight camping trip where engine noise is not
desired.
● Battery Mode will become available when the
displayed charge level on the vehicle High Voltage
State of Charge indicator is greater than or equal to
1%.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
● The Power Box will deactivate when the High Voltage
Battery is less than 1%.
Generator Mode
● In Generator Mode, the engine will run to power
equipment and maintain the charge of the High
Voltage Battery. When the High Voltage Battery is
finished charging or the vehicle is low of fuel, the
Power Box will switch to Battery Mode.
● Conditions where Generator Mode may be desired:
The customer wants to maintain a high battery
charge for future all-electric driving.
● For Generator Mode to function, the Low Fuel
Indicator can not be on.
● The engine will run until a low fuel-level is reached
or the battery charge is approximatly 95%. When
either of these states are achieved, the Power Box
will switch to Battery Mode.
Blended Mode
● In Blended Mode, the Engine runs and stops as
needed to maintain battery charge. This provides a
balance in efficiency and will keep the Power Box
powered for the longest amount of time.
● Press the Max Regeneration button when the Power
Box is on, and it is in either Battery Mode (post-start)
or Generator Mode.
Max Regeneration Button
● The Max Regen button indicator will illuminate when
the Power Box is in Blended Mode.
● Conditions where Blended Mode may be desired:
When extended AC power needs are required, use
this mode to maximize the duration of power.
● The engine will start (if not already running) when
the mode is activated. It will run for a minimum of
five seconds.
● The engine will stop and start as needed to
maintain the High Voltage Battery. When the Low
Fuel Indicator turns on, the Power Box will default to
Battery mode until the High Voltage Battery charge
level is approximately 1%.
NOTE:
If the Power Box is in Blended Mode and the Max
Regeneration button is pressed, it will default to
Generator Mode if the engine is ON and running. The
Power Box will default to Battery Mode if the battery
State of Charge (SOC) is above the minimum threshold
plus the engine is off. If the engine is off and the SOC is
below the minimum threshold, the system will turn off.
Powering On The Power Box
Follow these steps to power on the Power Box.
1. Set the Ignition in either ACC or RUN (engine
running or not running).
2. Connect the Power Box electric plug to the vehicle.
3. Push the Power Box AC On button.
If desired, the vehicles ignition can be turned off while
the Power Box is on. If the vehicle is turned off, the
following will occur:
● The Power Box will switch to Battery Mode (unless
already in Battery Mode) and stay powered until the
High Voltage Battery charge is depleted.
● Increases the total time Battery Mode can provide
120V AC power as it will be putting less power to the
in-vehicle systems.
To disable AC power to the AC outlets, push the AC On
button one time.
CAUTION!
Power off and disconnect the Power Box if any
electrical equipment/appliance has a strange odor,
or begins to smoke while the equipment or appliance
is powered ON or operating.
General Operating Notes
● If the Power Box is on and the AC On button is
pressed to stop power, the vehicle will completely
shut down.
1
8 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● The Engine will not run while in Battery Mode.
● When the Power Box is plugged in and while the AC
On button is not pushed on the panel, the vehicle
will display an “External Issue Detected” pop up and
a fault indication until Power Box is turned on.
● Ensure electrical equipment and appliance power
switches are in the Off position before inserting the
plug into the Power Box's power outlet.
● The Power Box will be reset to OFF every time the
Power Box assembly is unplugged.
● When the Power Box assembly is plugged in, the
vehicle can never be shifted out of Park.
● Disconnecting the Power Box from the vehicle will
always require the key to be recognized before the
vehicle can be driven again.
● The dash mounted SOC indicator lights will display
approximate High Voltage Battery charge level while
the Power Box is on.
Power Flow Process
See the following table for a description of how to
achieve any of the three operating modes.
*,**
Power Box Mode Process Flow
Resetting The Power Box
If the ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) is triggered,
it will shut off AC power, and the power LED will flash for
20 seconds. The following instructions will explain how
to reset the Power Box during this fault.
1. Unplug the Power Box cord from the vehicle for ten
(10) seconds and plug it back in.
2. Set the ignition to either ACC or RUN.
3. Push the Power Box AC On button to resume Power
Box operation.
NOTE:
If the GFCI reset procedure fails to resolve the fault,
please contact your authorized dealer for service.
*
Pre-start is transitioning to ignition RUN while the foot is not on the brake.
**
Post-start is transitioning to ignition RUN while the foot is on the brake.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
Performing An Internal Power Box Battery
Check
The Power Box has an internal rechargeable battery
that will start the Off-Board communications with your
electric vehicle. Should the internal battery be low/
discharged, you will need to use an external USB-C
power source to charge the Power Box.
NOTE:
Ensure you have a USB-C power source or external
adapter that can provide 5V/2A to the Type C
connector.
Procedure can be followed if the Power Box is plugged
in or unplugged from the vehicle.
1. Push the Power Box AC On button for one second
to start up internal power. The AC power indicator
will turn on and then off. If there are no flashes,
the Power Box battery is depleted. It must be
charged.
2. Push the Power Box AC On button again one
(1) time. The AC On button will flash once and
continue to flash three (3) times to indicate that
there is sufficient power to start the Power Box.
NOTE:
If the AC power light does not flash three times, the
internal battery is low. Use an external USB-C power
source to charge the battery.
Connecting a USB charger to the unit will allow it to
communicate with the vehicle immediately if connected
to the vehicle. The Power Box will recharge its internal
battery from the vehicle's High Voltage Battery. It will
take about 1 to 4 hours to charge the internal battery.
To perform the Power Box Internal Battery recharge:
1. Press the Power Box AC On button one (1) time.
The power indicator will flash On and then Off.
2. Prss the Power Box AC ON button one (1) time
again. The power and vehicle indicator will flash
alternately, meaning the Power Box is charging.
3. When the battery had finished charging, the power
and vehicle indicator on the Power Box will turn off.
Charge the Power Box lithium-ion battery every three (3)
months to maintain battery life. The Power Box internal
battery is not serviceable. Do not exceed one (1) year
without recharging the battery.
CAUTION!
It is important to follow these Power Box instructions
and cautions for overall use and operation. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in damage to the
Power Box, vehicle, and/or appliance.
● Never leave electrical equipment/appliances
connected and operating on the Power Box
unattended.
● It is recommended to plug electrical equipment/
appliances directly into the Power Box and not with
an extension cord.
● Never use high power electrical equipment/
appliances such as an air conditioner, washing
machine, or dryer.
● This product contains lithium-ion battery and
should be disposed appropriately to avoid fire and
environmental impact. Do not dispose with regular
household garbage.
LED Light Conditions
The below chart highlights the different LED light conditions on the Power Box:
Condition Normal Communications Fault Battery Checking Battery Charging
Description Normal Operation Waiting on Vehicle ON GFCI Fault
Check Internal Battery Lev-
el
Charging Battery with USB
C port
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Condition Normal Communications Fault Battery Checking Battery Charging
Power LED Solid/ON OFF Blinking 20 seconds OFF Charging: LED OFF
Fully Charged: Power and
vehicle indicator will flash
alternately when unit is
fully charged.
Vehicle LED Solid/ON Blinking 120 seconds OFF OFF
AC ON LED Solid/ON OFF OFF
Blinks 3 times: Sufficient
Power
Blinks 1 time: Lower Power
No Blink: Battery Depleted
OFF
Notes Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4
NOTE:
● When on, All three LEDs indicate AC power is
supplied to the AC Sockets.
● The LEDs will flash when the Power Box is
establishing communication with the vehicle. The
vehicle must enable the Power Box.
● A blinking LED indicates a fault.
REGENERATIVE BRAKING SYSTEM (RBS)
Your vehicle has a RBS. The RBS replenishes the
vehicle's high voltage battery during deceleration, and
is particularly useful in stop-and-go city traffic. The
electric motors, which propel the vehicle forward,
can operate as generators when braking. The RBS
recharges the high voltage battery under certain
braking conditions by recapturing energy that would
otherwise be lost while braking. The electric power that
is generated goes back into the high voltage battery for
later use, for example when acceleration is desired.
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes,
regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the
vehicle. If the system detects slippery conditions while
braking, ONLY friction is used to slow the vehicle.
The RBS can result in extended life of the hydraulic
service brakes; however, all inspection, scheduled
maintenance, and service intervals for the vehicle
service brakes must be followed.
Max Regeneration
Max Regeneration is a supplemental feature of the
RBS. When activated, it will use the RBS to help slow
the vehicle when the driver releases the accelerator
pedal. This feature allows you to moderately reduce
driving speed without pressing the brake pedal. It is
always necessary to apply the brake pedal to bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
Max Regeneration Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
This feature can be activated by pressing the Max
Regeneration button, below the radio screen.
NOTE:
The Max Regeneration feature will remain on once
selected, even after the vehicle is restarted.
E-SELECT MODE
This system allows the driver to select different modes
by pushing the following buttons located below the
headlight switch.
E-Select Mode Switch
● Hybrid: Depletes electric range first, then gas range.
○ Automatically switches between using gas and
battery for greatest efficiency and performance.
○ Best HVAC and acceleration performance.
○ Default Mode.
● Electric: Prevents the engine from running, unless
you absolutely need it.
○ Acceleration and heating performance may be
degraded.
○ Engine will switch on during a Wide Open Throttle
(WOT) event, or if cruise control requires it.
○ Vehicle will automatically switch to Hybrid mode
upon reaching 0% State Of Charge (SOC) or due
to system needs.
○ Not allowed with manual gate operation unless in
4WD Low and Selec-Speed Control (SSC) is active.
● e-Save: Engine only. Saves the current SOC/Electric
range for later.
○ SOC/Electric range may increase, but will not
decrease under most driving conditions. Under
heavy load, such as while pulling a trailer, SOC
may decrease.
○ Engine may turn off at a stop.
○ You can further customize the e-Save operation in
the radio,
ð
page 211.
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION
SAE J1772 CHAR
GING INLET
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE J1772
charge inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for both AC Level 1
(120 V) and AC Level 2 (240 V) charging.
Vehicle Charge Inlet Location
Open the charge port door by pushing near the rear
outer edge of the door, near the center to unlatch. To
close the charge port door, engage the door latch by
pushing on the rear outer edge near the center.
NOTE:
Only utilize UL-certified (UL 2594) charging equipment
to charge your vehicle. Failure to do so may result in
safety hazards.
AC LEVEL 1 CHARGING (120 VOLT, 12
AMP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a 120 Volt AC, SAE J1772
Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE), also
referred to as a Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE).
AC Level 1 charging requires a conventional NEMA
5-15R 120 Volt AC grounded wall outlet along with
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) provided with the
vehicle.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Please be sure to follow the warnings below. Failure
to do so may result in serious injury or death
● Discontinue use of the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if the plug or outlet becomes
hot to the touch or if you notice any unusual odors.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) in building structures that use fuse-based
circuit protection. Use only with electrical circuits
protected by circuit breakers.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
other devices are plugged into the same circuit.
● When unplugging the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) from the wall outlet, be sure to pull by the
plug, and not the cord.
● Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or drag the cord of
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE).
● Stop using the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if charging stops before it’s
completed when the plug or cord is moved or
adjusted.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
if the plug has a loose connection with the wall
outlet or if the wall outlet is damaged or rusted.
● If in any doubt about the wall outlet and/or circuit,
contact a qualified electrician.
● Do not use if a malfunction occurs or if the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) has been
damaged in any manner. It is recommended that
you contact an authorized dealership.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● There are no user serviceable parts inside the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt
to repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE), doing so will void the New Vehicle
Warranty.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
WARNING!
Electrical shock, fire, and other serious hazards
can occur if the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
is not used properly. This vehicle uses a high
voltage current. Failure to follow the proper charging
instructions in this publication can cause serious
injury or death. There are no serviceable parts
in the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not
open, disassemble, penetrate, or tamper with the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Failure to follow
this warning can result in electrical shock, fire,
property damage, and death or serious injury.
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is stored in the
rear cargo area below the load floor. To access this
area, lift up the cargo strap of the load floor cover, and
remove the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the
storage bag in the bin below.
Moving, Transporting, And Storage Instructions
After use, the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should
be placed in the storage bag and put back in the cargo
storage area. If the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
will be left outside the vehicle, be sure to protect the
device’s connection end from moisture, dirt, and debris
accumulation and contamination.
Load Floor Cover
NOTE:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is used for AC
Level 1 charging only.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
WARNING!
Please be sure to follow these warnings. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death.
● Discontinue use of the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if the plug or outlet becomes
hot to the touch or if you notice any unusual odors.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) in building structures that use fuse-based
circuit protection. Use only with electrical circuits
protected by circuit breakers.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
other devices are plugged into the same circuit.
● When unplugging the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) from the wall outlet, be sure to pull by the
plug, and not the cord.
● Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or drag the cord of
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE).
● Stop using the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if charging stops before it’s
completed when the plug or cord is moved or
adjusted.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
if the plug has a loose connection with the wall
outlet or if the wall outlet is damaged or rusted.
● If in any doubt about the wall outlet and/or circuit,
contact a qualified electrician.
● Do not use if a malfunction occurs or if the
Portable Charging Cordset has been damaged in
any manner. It is recommended that you contact
an authorized dealership.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● There are no user serviceable parts inside the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt
to repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE), doing so will void the New Vehicle
Warranty.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is compliant with
SAE J1772, and applicable for use with vehicles fitted
with standard SAE J1772 charge inlets. The Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) includes:
● A Charge Connector
● A NEMA 6 rated enclosure with a Charge Current
Interrupt Device (CCID) with status indicator display
● An AC Power Cord with a NEMA 5–15P right angle
plug
● An indoor/outdoor charge cable, EV-rated
● A Status Indicator Display
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
1 — Charge Connector
2 — Charge Cable
3 — AC Plug
4 — EVSE Enclosure
5 — Status Indicator Display
Grounding Instructions
For A Grounded, Cord-Connected Product:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) must be
grounded. If it should malfunction or break down,
grounding provides a path of least resistance for an
electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock.
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is equipped
with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor
and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged
into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed
and grounded in accordance with all local codes and
ordinances.
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
on electrical circuits with two-prong outlets; use with
improper outlets could result in electric shock, fire,
property damage, and death or serious injury. Check
with a qualified electrician if you are in doubt as to
whether the wall outlet is properly grounded. Do not
modify the plug prongs provided with the Portable
Charging Corset (EVSE) – if it does not fit the outlet,
you must have a proper outlet installed by a qualified
electrician.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
Installation And Operating Instructions
1. Always insert the AC plug prongs of the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) into a 15 A, or 20 A, 120
VAC, 60 Hz, grounded wall outlet first. Do not use
an extension cord, outlet/plug adapter, or a worn
outlet. The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) will
not operate safely unless it is plugged directly into
the wall outlet.
NOTE:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
plugged into a dedicated circuit, not a circuit
shared with other devices drawing electricity on
the circuit.
AC Plug And Wall Receptacle
WARNING!
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
on electrical circuits with two-prong outlets; use
with improper outlets could result in electric
shock, fire, property damage, and death or
serious injury. Check with a qualified electrician
if you are in doubt as to whether the wall
outlet is properly grounded. Do not modify the
plug prongs provided with the Portable Charging
Corset (EVSE) – if it does not fit the outlet, you
must have a proper outlet installed by a qualified
electrician.
2. Check to see if the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) is ready to charge by reviewing the indicator
lights.
Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) Indicator Lights
1 — AC Power Indicator Light
2 — Fault Indicator Light
3 — Check Outlet Indicator Light
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
3. If the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is ready
to charge, ensure the vehicle is in PARK, and
then connect the charge connector to the vehicle’s
charge inlet. You will hear a “click” when the
charge connector is inserted correctly and coupled
with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
Inserting The Charge Connector
Into The Vehicle Charge Inlet
4. When the vehicle commences charging, the green
indicator light will turn on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
● Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) — The
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) status
indicator lights illuminate green, red, or yellow
to identify the charging status
ð
page 26.
● Wall Outlet — Check whether the wall outlet
is functional (no power outage) and/or plug
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) into a
different wall outlet.
● Charging Schedule — Check whether the
charging schedules have been enabled. If
enabled, check that you are within the
scheduled time and day of the week. If a
charging schedule has been enabled in the
vehicle, and it is outside the time and day of
the week, you may override the schedule for
this charging event by plugging in the charge
connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it
back into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the
double plug sequence within 10 seconds for it
to override the set schedule.
● Hood Ajar — Check whether the hood is open.
Charging is disabled while the hood is open,
and will resume when the hood closes.
5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle
first, and then from the wall outlet. To disengage
the vehicle coupler, push the button on the
connector.
Removing The Charge Connector
From The Vehicle Charge Inlet
6. Close the inlet door when a Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) is not connected to the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is good practice to keep the ignition in the OFF
position while conducting Level 1 charging. This
minimizes any additional vehicle loads the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) has to support. The additional
electrical loads will extend the high voltage battery
charging time.
Troubleshooting Using The Status
Indicator Display
If the vehicle is not charging properly, consult the status
indicator lights.
The Green LED signals correct operation of the system.
The Red LED signals a failure in the charging system.
The Yellow LED signals a failure with the outlet.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LED Indicator Lights
1 — Green LED
2 — Red LED
3 — Yellow LED
Any faults in charging are displayed by the LEDs, either
steady or flashing, located on the status indicator
display of the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Refer
to the following troubleshooting table.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
OFF OFF OFF
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) not connected to the
domestic charging outlet or power failure in the domestic
power supply mains.
ON OFF OFF
There are no faults in the domestic power supply mains, so
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) can be connected to
the charge inlet on the vehicle.
ON ON (Flashing) ON
Overheating at the charging outlet of the domestic power
supply mains.
When the normal temperature is reached, the system will
make a new charge attempt at a lower current level.
ON OFF ON (Flashing)
Charging to a lower current level due to overheating of the
charging outlet of the domestic power supply mains.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
ON ON ON (Flashing)
Overheating at the charging outlet of the domestic power
supply mains.
Carefully disconnect the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
from both the vehicle and power outlet and wait for the
plug and outlet to return to normal temperatures. Then, re-
connect the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) to the power
outlet and vehicle and charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (2 Blinks) ON (2 Blinks)
Lack of grounding cable in the charging outlet of the do-
mestic power supply mains.
The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts in total).
ON ON ON (2 Blinks)
Lack of grounding cable in the charging outlet of the do-
mestic power supply mains.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and the outlet
and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new anomaly.
ON (Flashing) OFF OFF Domestic mains power incorrectly supplied.
The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the Portable Charging Cord-
set (EVSE) from the vehicle and the outlet and reconnect it,
then try to charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (Flashing) OFF Charge Current Interrupt Device (CCID) fault trip over
one second after relay closure. Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) retrying to charge the vehicle.
The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts in total).
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
ON ON OFF
Charge Current Interrupt Device (CCID) fault, Retry Exhaust-
ed or Retry is disallowed if trips within one second of relay
closure.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and the outlet
and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON OFF Dispersion of the electricity on the vehicle.
Disconnect the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the
vehicle and the outlet and reconnect it, then try to charge
again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (Flashing) OFF Electric charging current too high.
The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts total).
ON ON (7 Blinks) OFF Electric charging current too high.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and the outlet
and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (2 Blinks) OFF Charging abnormality on the vehicle. The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the Portable Charging Cord-
set (EVSE) from the vehicle and the domestic power outlet
and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (3 Blinks) OFF
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) failure.
ON ON (4 Blinks) OFF
ON ON (5 Blinks) OFF
ON ON (6 Blinks) OFF
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
Guidelines for preventing fire and electric shock:
● Ensure the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is
positioned so it will not be stepped on, tripped over,
or otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
● There are no user serviceable parts inside.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if it
is visibly damaged. Contact an authorized dealership
for service.
● Do not place fingers, or any other objects inside the
charge connector.
● Do not allow children to operate the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE). Adult supervision is
mandatory when children are in proximity when the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is in use.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an extension cord or plug adapters.
● Do not unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
from the wall outlet during a charging operation.
Charging Inlet Warning Label
1 — Dangerous Situation
2 — Risk Of Electric Shock
3 — Reference Owner’s Information
4 — Charging Timer Set
5 — Charging Procedure In Progress
6 — Charging Procedure Complete
7 — Fault In Charging Procedure
NOTE:
During normal operation, the charge connector or AC
plug may feel warm. If either one feels hot during
charging, unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
and have a qualified electrician inspect the wall outlet
before you continue charging
ð
page 371.
WARNING!
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an outlet that is worn or damaged. Failure to
follow this warning can result in electrical shock, fire,
property damage, and death or serious injury.
AC LEVEL 2 CHARGING (240 VOLT, 40
AMP)
AC Level 2 (240 V) charging requires a 240 V, Level
2 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) charging
station. We recommend using a Level 2 EVSE charger
with up to 48 amps for home installation.
When using public charging stations, ensure the
charging station is ready to provide charge and the
vehicle is in PARK before the Level 2 EVSE is plugged
into the vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click”
when the charge connector is inserted correctly and is
coupled with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If not,
please check the following:
● Charging Station — Check the indications and
instructions at the charging station.
● Charging Schedule — Check whether the charging
schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle
is currently within the scheduled charge time/day
(weekday/weekend). If the charging schedule is
enabled within the vehicle, you may override it
for this charging event by plugging in the charge
connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it back
into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the double
plug sequence within 10 seconds for it to override
the set schedule.
● Hood Ajar — Check whether the hood is open.
Charging is disabled while the hood is open, and will
resume when the hood closes.
To stop the charging process:
● Press the “STOP” button located on the front of the
EVSE station.
● Press the button located on the Level 2 EVSE vehicle
connector.
● Remove the connector from the vehicle charge inlet.
● Plug the charge handle into the Level 2 EVSE station
and coil the charging cord onto its holder. Do not
leave the charging cord lying on the ground.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CHARGING TIMES
The following factors determine the time it takes to
charge the high voltage battery:
● The high voltage battery’s current state of charge
● The type of Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE)
used (Level 1 – 120 V or Level 2 – 240 V)
● Ambient temperature
● Whether the vehicle’s ignition is in the RUN position
during charging
NOTE:
● The following charging times are estimates based on
charging a high voltage battery that has a <1% State
Of Charge (SOC) value displayed in the instrument
cluster.
● Charging times will vary based on the age, condition,
SOC, available current being provided to the charger
from its energy source, and temperature of the high
voltage battery.
● Charging times may be longer if a thermal self-
protection reduces the charging current from the
EVSE being used.
● If the vehicle’s ignition is in either the ACC or
RUN position, the vehicle charge indicator may not
indicate greater than a 99% SOC and will continue to
charge the vehicle, due to the vehicle loads.
Type of EVSE Estimated Charge Time
Level 1 (120 V/15 A) Approximately 12 hours
Type of EVSE Estimated Charge Time
Level 2 (240 V/30 A or
32 A)
Approximately 2 hours
VEHICLE CHARGE INDICATORS
Instrument Cluster High V
oltage Battery Display
There is a battery display indicator located on the
instrument cluster. The battery display will indicate the
current State Of Charge (SOC) for the high voltage
battery; with the percentage value located to the right
of the symbol. When plugged in, the battery symbol also
indicates the battery level along with messages about
the charge or whether the system is waiting to charge
due to the charge schedule. These will appear unless
there is a charging fault. A green plug telltale will be
shown in the cluster, as well as applicable messaging
when charging.
Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator
In addition to the battery display in the instrument
cluster, your vehicle is equipped with a visual SOC
indicator. The SOC indicator is made up of four lights
that are mounted to the top center of the instrument
panel, which will illuminate when the vehicle is plugged
into the charging system.
State Of Charge Indicator
The SOC indicator provides a visual indication of the
high voltage battery’s charge status during charging. It
is also used to indicate a charging problem as well as
waiting for a scheduled charge to begin.
NOTE:
● The lights scroll one at a time when the vehicle is
plugged in outside of its charging schedule time/day
of the week, and it is waiting on the schedule to
begin charging.
● In extreme hot or cold environments, the lights on
the SOC indicator may not illuminate. Charge status
is available in the instrument cluster display. In the
event of an error in the charging process, the outer
two lights will blink.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
High Voltage Battery Display
● When the hood is open, the lights on the SOC
indicator will not be illuminated.
Indicator Lights Illumi-
nated
P
ercent Of Battery Charge
1st light blinks 0 – 25%
1st light on, 2nd light
blinks
26 – 50%
1st and 2nd lights on,
3rd light blinks
51 – 75%
1st, 2nd, and 3rd lights
on, 4th light blinks
76 – 99%
All four lights on 100%
Two outer lights are
blinking
Indicates an error in the
charging process
Lights turn on one at a
time from left to right
(when looking at the
front of the vehicle)
Indicates system is wait-
ing for scheduled time in
charge schedule to begin
charging
All lights turn on, then
immediately turn off
Indicates a successful
plug-in
NOTE:
For each segment of lights illuminated indicating the
percent of battery charge, two different blink rates
are used. A blink rate of 1 second on/1 second off
indicates that the first half is charging. The blink
rate will increase to 0.5 second on/0.5 second off to
indicate that the second half is charging. When the
battery is fully charged, the blinking stops and the lights
remain illuminated as charging continues.
Next to the charging inlet, there is an LED that changes
color based on charging status.
Charging Inlet LED Location
LED Charging Inlet
LED Light Color Status
Blue Indicates that the system is wait-
ing for a scheduled recharge.
Flashing Green Charging process in place.
Solid Green Indicates the vehicle is fully
charged.
LED Charging Inlet
LED Light Color Status
Blinking Red Indicates a fault in the charging
system.
HYBRID ELECTRIC PAGES
Within your Uconnect system is the Hybrid Electric App
that allows you to see your vehicle’s power flow,
understand your driving history, and set a charging
schedule for your vehicle’s high voltage battery. To
access this app, press the Apps button on the main
menu bar of the radio’s touchscreen, and locate the
Hybrid Electric App. Pressing the app icon brings
you to a set of hybrid electric pages: Power Flow,
Driving History, Charging Schedule, e-Save, and Charge
Settings (if equipped).
Apps Menu Screen
Power Flow
The Power Flow screen shows the current power
readings for all of the following:
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● Engine - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
engine is generating. Based on vehicle operating
● Battery - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
high voltage battery is currently providing/absorbing.
A negative kW indicates the vehicle’s high voltage
battery is charging.
● Climate - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
Climate Control system is using to maintain the
current interior temperature.
Power Flow paths are indicated by the direction of the
arrows on the touchscreen.
Power Flow Screen
Driving History
The Driving History screen shows the miles (km) driven
in both Full Electric and Hybrid (battery and engine
powered) modes for both the previous week and the
current week. The data is displayed in a bar graph:
Electric mode in teal and Hybrid mode in blue.
On the bar graph, miles (km) driven on the same day
in Electric mode (battery only) are always shown below
miles (km) driven in Hybrid mode. When one day of the
week exceeds 100 miles (160 km) driven, the values
for miles (km) driven in Electric and Hybrid modes will
be listed above the bar graph in respective colors (teal
for Electric and blue for Hybrid).
Driving History Screen
Charging Schedule
To set a charging schedule, select the Hybrid Electric
App on the touchscreen and follow these steps:
1. Select “Schedules”.
Charging Schedules Screen
2. Select one of the three charging schedules by
pressing the appropriate arrow on the right side
of the screen.
3. Select if Scheduled Charging should “Charge Until
Full”.
4. Set the Charge Start Time: Hours, Minutes, and
AM/PM.
NOTE:
This is to occur every week (as long as the vehicle
is connected to a Charging Cable).
Set Charge Schedule
5. When done, press the back arrow. The active
schedule will be indicated by the check mark to
the right of the schedule event line. The Event
Action and Time will be displayed.
6. To add another Scheduled Charging event, repeat
these steps.
NOTE:
A maximum of two independent Scheduled
Charging events can be scheduled at a given time.
If “Charge Until Full” is selected, the vehicle must be
plugged in within five minutes of the start time. The
following are situations in which “Charge Until Full” may
not be honored:
● If selected for five days (Monday through Friday), and
the vehicle is plugged in five or more minutes after
the start time on any of those days, “Charge Until
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
conditions, this power is used to: propel the vehicle,
provide passenger compartment heating, power
vehicle electrical loads, and charge the high voltage
battery. Engine operation is controlled to maximize
fuel economy.
Full” will not be honored for that day. “Charge Until
Full” will resume on the next day at the scheduled
time.
● If there are multiple plug/unplug events after first
being plugged in within five minutes, “Charge Until
Full” will not be honored for that day.
● If other schedules (Charge Interval, etc.) are set at
a later time in addition to “Charge Until Full” being
selected, and the vehicle is plugged in five or more
minutes after the scheduled start time, “Charge Until
Full” will not be honored for that day. The next
available schedule will be followed.
NOTE:
● If the charging schedule is not enabled, the vehicle
will charge whenever plugged in. It is not necessary
to set up the charging schedule to charge the
vehicle.
● If the vehicle is plugged in outside of the charging
schedule set in the Uconnect system (and Charge
Until Full is not selected), the vehicle’s battery will
not charge. Charging will only begin immediately if
the vehicle is plugged in within the time and day of
the week set in the schedule. Otherwise, charging
will automatically begin when the selected charge
time/day of the week occurs or whenever the vehicle
is plugged in with no charge schedule set.
● Scheduled Charging may be bypassed and charging
will begin automatically if the high voltage battery
State Of Charge (SOC) is below its optimal operating
point.
● If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging
window, a radio pop-up message will be displayed,
which provides an option to begin charging the
vehicle immediately. The pop-up message asks
the driver if they would like to “Charge Now?”
and provides other information, including the next
charging schedule start time and estimated time
to charge the battery to 100%. If within one hour
of selecting “Yes,” the vehicle is connected to a
powered Charging Cable, the vehicle will immediately
begin to charge (temporarily ignoring any set charge
schedule). To fully deactivate the charge schedule,
refer to the “Schedules” feature within the Hybrid
Electric App.
● The charging schedule can also be overridden if
the Charging Cable is plugged in, unplugged, and
then plugged in a second time to the vehicle. After
the first plug in ofthe vehicle, wait until the battery
charge indicator on the instrument panel lights up
before unplugging. This “double plug sequence”
will override the schedule that is set in the radio,
and begin charging the vehicle immediately. The
double plug sequence must be completed within 10
seconds for it to override the programmed schedule.
● If “Charge Until Full” is selected, and the vehicle is
plugged in after the start time of the schedule, the
vehicle will start charging when it reaches the start
time the next day. If you would like to begin charging
immediately, and continue charging until the vehicle
is fully charged, you can select the “Charge Now”
option or use the double plug override option.
There is also a Climate Schedule which can be set and
managed for climate or cabin conditioning.
SCHEDULE BYPASS
NOTE:
If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging
window, a radio pop-up message will be displayed.
The pop-up message asks the driver if they would
like to “Charge Now?” and provides the next charging
schedule start time and estimated time to charge the
battery to 100%. If within one hour of selecting “Yes”,
the vehicle is connected to a powered EVSE, the vehicle
will immediately begin to charge (temporarily ignoring
any set charge schedule). To fully deactivate the charge
schedule, select the “Enable Schedule” checkbox until
the check mark is removed from the box.
The charging schedule can also be overridden if an
EVSE is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged in a
second time to the vehicle. This double plug sequence
will override the set schedule in the Hybrid Electric
Pages App, and begin charging the vehicle immediately.
The double plug sequence must be completed within
10 seconds for it to override the programmed schedule.
e-Save
The fourth screen within the Hybrid Electric Pages App
is the e-Save screen. From this screen, you can specify
the behavior of the e-Save drive mode:
e-Save Screen
● Battery Save - Maintains the high voltage State
of Charge at its current level under most driving
scenarios.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The SOC may increase if there is sufficient energy
capture through regenerative braking.
● Battery Charge - Uses additional power from the gas
engine to increase the high voltage State of Charge,
up to 95% capacity.
NOTE:
For information on jump starting your vehicle,
ð
page
289.
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start (if
equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
the doors and swing gate from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The
key fob also contains a mechanical flip key.
NOTE:
● The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
● With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at 2 mph
(4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only with
the key fob facing away from your body, especially
your eyes and objects that may be damaged, such as
clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key fob
may be damaged if the key fob is subjected to
strong electrical shocks. In order to ensure complete
efficiency of the electronic devices inside of the key
fob, avoid exposing the key fob to direct sunlight.
Key Fob
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — LED Indicator
3 — Unlock Button
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — Panic Button
NOTE:
● In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery condition
may be indicated by a message in the instrument
cluster display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If
the LED key fob light no longer illuminates from key
fob button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
replacement.
● Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be
harmful to the environment. Please see an
authorized dealer for proper battery disposal
ð
page 371.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Swing
Gate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all the
doors and swing gate. To lock all the doors, push the
lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash. When the doors are locked, the turn signals will
flash and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through the Uconnect
Settings
ð
page 211.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN
or START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
● The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
● These alerts will not be activated in situations where
either the vehicle’s engine is left running with the
key fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are
blocked.
Using The Panic Feature
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic
button on the key fob. When the Panic feature is
activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn may
pulse on and off (if equipped with horn alarm), and the
interior lights will turn on.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
● The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position while the Panic feature is
activated. However, the exterior lights and horn (if
equipped with horn alarm) will remain on.
● You may need to be closer than 66 ft (20 m) from
the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the
Panic feature due to the radio frequency noises
emitted by the system.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.
NOTE:
● Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
● Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
● Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
● When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be
indicated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster, and
the fob LED will no longer illuminate with a button
press.
1. Remove the back cover of the fob by inserting a
flat-blade screwdriver into the slot on the bottom of
the fob. Pry until the cover unsnaps being careful
not to damage the seal. Proceed counterclockwise
to pry the remaining snaps until the battery cover
can be removed.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small
flat-blade screwdriver into the battery removal
slot and sliding the battery forward and up
being careful not to damage the electronic board
underneath.
Battery Replacement
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making
sure the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the
battery until it is seated securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is
properly aligned before snapping it back in place.
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
● If you think a battery may have been swallowed
or placed inside any part of the body, seek
immediate medical attention.
● Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
● Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics.
A blank key fob is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE:
● When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
● Key fob with mechanical flip key must be ordered to
the correct key cut to match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine.
The system does not need to be armed or activated.
Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key
fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used
to start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot
reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. If a valid key
fob is used to start the engine but there is an issue with
the vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut
off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced
as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
ð
page
371.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — RUN
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
● The engine is stopped.
● Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are available.
ACC
● Engine is not started.
● Some electrical devices (e.g. climate controls,
heated seats, etc.) are available.
RUN
● Driving position.
● All electrical devices are available.
START
● The engine will start.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of the START/STOP ignition button, the key fob
may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation,
a backup method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side with the
mechanical flip key) against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
CAUTION!
● Do not press the mechanical key against the
START/STOP ignition button.
● Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screwdriver
etc.) to pry the button out of the ignition switch.
This button comes as an assembly, and is not
removable. This can damage the silicone shield.
Backup Starting Method
Do Not Use Mechanical Key
WARNING!
● When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
● For more information on normal starting, see
ð
page 150.
● When opening the driver's door with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message
will display “Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION —
HYBRID ONL
Y
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left with the ignition in the
RUN position (engine not running) with gear selector
in PARK for 30 minutes, it will automatically turn off
the vehicle. If the driver door is opened, then closed
while propulsion is active and the vehicle is in PARK,
the vehicle will shut down. Notifications have been
designed into this feature to raise awareness of the
timed event by showing messages in the instrument
cluster display.
The instrument cluster display will also show the
message “Ready to Drive” accompanied with three
audible chimes while the driver door is opened while
the ignition state is in READY mode. The interior
warnings will occur regardless of whether the key fob
remains in the vehicle or is removed. The horn will
sound three times, and the turn signals will flash, if the
key fob is removed from the vehicle while the ignition
state is in READY mode.
To restart the vehicle, follow the normal process for
starting your vehicle.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE:
● Pushing the START/STOP ignition button may only
activate the Electric Propulsion system and not start
the vehicle’s engine (if running the engine is not
currently required by the Hybrid system). READY will
show in the instrument cluster display whenever the
vehicle is operating in Electric mode and the vehicle
is stationary.
● If the vehicle’s ignition is in either ACC or RUN, the
vehicle charge indicator may not display a value
greater than 99% state of charge due to vehicle
loads.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — RUN
The ignition can be placed in the following positions:
OFF
● The vehicle is stopped
● Some electrical devices are available
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
ACC
● Some electrical devices are available
● Mechanical power (vehicle propulsion) is not
available
RUN
● Driving position
● All electrical devices are available
● As long as READY appears in the instrument cluster
display, it does not matter if the engine is running or
not, vehicle propulsion is available
START
● The vehicle will start
NOTE:
Vehicle propulsion is only available after the vehicle has
passed through the START position.
Conditions Which May Cause The Engine To Run
● When the Hybrid Battery State of Charge (SOC) has
reached <1%
● When applying maximum vehicle acceleration
● While maintaining the Exhaust System Catalyst
Temperature in Hybrid or e-Save modes
● When the hood is open with the ignition in RUN,
post-START mode
● When Manual Mode/Tip Mode is in use
● When the engine is temporarily operating in Fuel and
Oil Refresh Mode (e.g. if the system detects a stale
fuel or aged oil condition after a long period without
combustion engine operation)
● When the vehicle is started in very cold ambient
temperatures
● When the vehicle is in a lower ambient temperature
and may need to support passenger compartment
heating
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of the START/STOP ignition button, the key fob
may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation,
a backup method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side with the
mechanical flip key) against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
CAUTION!
● Do not press the mechanical key against the
START/STOP ignition button.
● Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screwdriver
etc.) to pry the button out of the ignition switch.
This button comes as an assembly, and is not
removable. This can damage the silicone shield.
NOTE:
In extreme climates (hot or cold environments), the
vehicle will need to be plugged in prior to starting the
vehicle, or the vehicle may not start.
WARNING!
● When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ACC or RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for theft. Always
turn the vehicle off, remove the key fobs from the
vehicle, and lock all the doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
If the brake is pressed and the ignition is placed
in the RUN position with an EVSE connected to the
vehicle, the instrument cluster display will not display
the READY state. When the Electric Vehicle Supply
Equipment (EVSE) is unplugged from the vehicle, the
vehicle will go into the READY state. If the vehicle is not
shifted out of PARK 30 minutes after being unplugged,
the vehicle will disable the READY state. After an
additional 30 minutes with no change in ignition status,
the ignition will turn off and the vehicle will power down.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For more information on normal starting, see
ð
page
153.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The
system has a range of approximately 328 ft
(100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the customer enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
● The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
● Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
ð
page 371.
WARNING!
● Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE R
EMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors and
swing gate will lock, the turn signals will flash twice,
and the horn will chirp twice. Pushing the Remote Start
button again will shut the engine off.
NOTE:
● With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes.
● Remote Start can only be used twice.
● If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
● The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
● For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
● The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors closed
● Hood closed
● Swing gate closed
● Hazard switch off
● Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
● Battery at an acceptable charge level
● Panic button not pushed
● System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
● Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
● Ignition in OFF position
● Fuel level meets minimum requirement
● All removable doors must not be removed
● Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) not illuminated
WARNING!
● Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START
MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP
ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again,
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15
minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
● To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
● For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote
Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the
instrument cluster display until you push the START/
STOP ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST ACTIVATION
— IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system
will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes
or less. The timing is dependent on the ambient
temperature. Once the timer expires, the system will
automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defroster will automatically turn on in cold weather
conditions. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed in the
Comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 211. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start is
activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
dependent on the outside ambient temperature.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a rear climate system,
it will remain off to allow for optimal front row
performance.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings dependent on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
● In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
● In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
● In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
ð
page 79.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
● Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
● Remote Start Canceled — Swing Gate Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
● Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
● Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (HYBRID
ONLY)
NOTE:
Remote Start while the vehicle is plugged in may not
always start the engine.
This system uses the key fob to start
the vehicle conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The
system has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start also activates the Climate Control system
in temperatures above 80°F (26.7°C), and the heated
seats (if equipped) and heated steering wheel (if
equipped) in temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C).
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will remote start:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors closed
● Hood closed
● Swing gate closed
● Hazard switch off
● Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
● 12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
● Key fob Panic button not pushed
● System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
● Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
● Ignition in OFF position
● Fuel level meets minimum requirement
● All removable doors must not be removed
● Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off while the
vehicle’s propulsion system is active
WARNING!
● Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO ENTER REMOTE START
MODE
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the turn signals will flash twice (if enabled in
Uconnect Settings), and the horn will chirp twice (if
enabled in Uconnect Settings). Then the engine/vehicle
will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote
Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
● The vehicle can be started two consecutive times
(two 15 minute cycles) using the key fob. After two
Remote Start events have occurred, the ignition
must be placed in the RUN position before any
additional Remote Start requests can be received.
● The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
● For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE WITHOUT
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or
allow the Remote Start cycle to complete the entire 15
minute cycle.
In addition, the ignition can be placed in the RUN
(Propulsion System Available) position by pushing the
ignition button with the key fob inside the vehicle, and
then pushing the ignition button one more time to place
the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
● To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
● For additional functions of the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 42.
SCHEDULED CABIN CONDITIONING (SCC)
This feature allows the driver to pre-condition (warm
up or cool down) the passenger cabin based on a
planned departure time. The target temperature is
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
preset to the same values used by the Remote Start
feature. Unlike Remote Start, the driver does not need
to initiate the cabin conditioning by pushing the Remote
Start button, instead, a programmed departure time
will be used. Also, all scheduled cabin conditioning
will be powered by the vehicle’s high voltage battery
working in conjunction with any EVSE connected to the
vehicle. Unlike Remote Start, in SCC the vehicle’s gas
engine will not start to provide power or heat for cabin
conditioning.
In order to conserve the vehicle’s high voltage battery
power, the driver can choose between allowing the
battery to be drained of power down to <1%, or to
stop the SCC when the high voltage battery has been
depleted to 25% State Of Charge (SOC). The battery
percentages are displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
A maximum of three independent schedule event
timers are available for use by the SCC feature and
Scheduled Charging feature for charging the high
voltage battery. The timers may be used in any
combination for SCC and Scheduled Charging, but only
three total timers are available.
The SCC event times are used to wake up the vehicle
so that the Climate Control system can condition the
passenger cabin prior to the scheduled departure
time. Based on vehicle operating conditions, ambient
temperature, and the next programmed departure
time, the vehicle will determine when to begin cabin
conditioning. Cabin conditioning can begin up to
30 minutes prior to the scheduled departure time,
provided the stated high voltage battery conditions are
met.
The SCC will continue for a maximum of 15 minutes
after the scheduled departure time.
Once a scheduled event has been created, it can be
applied to one or more days of the week. The scheduled
event can also be set to occur only during the current
week, or repeat every week until the feature is turned
off or the event is changed.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will initiate a scheduled SCC event:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors Closed
● Hood Closed
● Liftgate Closed
● Hazard switch off
● 12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
● Key fob not located inside the vehicle
● Ignition in the OFF position
● Remote Start has not been activated
Scheduling An SCC Event:
1. Select the Hybrid Electric App on the touchscreen.
2. Select “Schedules”.
Schedules Screen
3. Select the schedule to be set (1,2, or 3) by
pressing the appropriate arrow on the right side
of the touchscreen.
4. Choose “Climate Schedule”.
Select Climate Schedule
5. Select if SCC should stop when the high voltage
battery drops to 25% or lower.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Set the Departure Time: Hours, Minutes, and
AM/PM.
Set Climate Schedule
7. Select the days that this SCC event will occur. The
“Repeat” indicator illuminates to indicate that SCC
will occur every week on the selected day(s), at the
selected time.
If you uncheck the “Repeat” option, all the days
of the week will be grayed out and the vehicle
will perform only one SCC event, which will occur
at the next available time that matches the SCC
event time (regardless of what day it was originally
set to occur before “Repeat” was unchecked).
8. To schedule another SCC event, press the X and
repeat these steps.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated,
the interior switches for door locks are disabled.
The Vehicle Security system provides both audible
and visible signals. If something triggers the alarm,
the Vehicle Security system will provide the following
audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. If any doors or windows are open, close them.
2. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
● Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
● Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
ð
page 46.
● Push the lock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
● Push the unlock button on the key fob.
● Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
ð
page 46.
● Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
● The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system.
● When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain
in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF E
QUIPPED
The power door lock switch is located on each front
door panel. Push the switch forward to unlock the
doors, and rearward to lock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
WARNING!
● For personal security reasons and safety in a
collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive,
as well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the
ignition and remove the key from the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE ENTRY
(IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and swing
gate without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
● Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within the
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 211.
● The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these
devices may interfere with the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
● Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, parking lights) for
whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signals.
● If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing,
or there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
● The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
● If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security
system.
To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5
m) of the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the
vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock
the driver door automatically. Grabbing the passenger
door handle will unlock all doors and the swing gate
automatically.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
ð
page 211.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function only if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with a START/
STOP ignition. There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
● A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
● A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
● A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer. If Passive
Entry is disabled using Uconnect system, the key fob
protection described in this section remains active/
functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a FOBIK-
Safe operation when a valid Passive Entry key fob is
detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
● A second valid Passive Entry key fob is detected
outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a
Passive Entry door handle).
● The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
● Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch, and then the doors are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5
ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the
vehicle doors and the swing gate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate
The swing gate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the swing gate handle. With a valid Passive Entry
key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the swing gate handle,
grab the swing gate handle to unlock the swing gate
automatically, and pull the swing gate to open.
Swing Gate Passive Entry Lock Button
To Lock The Swing Gate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the swing gate handle, pushing the Passive Entry lock
button will lock the vehicle doors and the swing gate.
NOTE:
● After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using any Passive Entry door handle.
This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle
unlocking.
● If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-
Safe)" remains active/functional.
● The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted
ð
page 371.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition
is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15
mph (24 km/h). The Automatic Door Lock feature
can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer
per written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM —
REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-
blade screwdriver (or mechanical flip key) and rotate
the dial to the lock or unlock position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
● When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
● After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the unlocked position.
● After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the locked position.
● For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock lever rearward (located on the door trim
panel), lower the window and open the door with the
outside door handle.
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only. Failure to follow this
warning can result in death or serious personal injury.
Door Removal Warning Label
WARNING!
● All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
ð
page 205.
● Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle,
as they may cause personal injury in the event of
an accident.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors.
If you choose to remove the doors, see an authorized
dealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror.
Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-
road use.
NOTE:
● Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
● Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For off-road
driving tips, see
ð
page 205.
● When front doors are removed, the message “Blind
Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will display in the
instrument cluster display. Power Mirrors and Power
Door Locks will also be unavailable.
To remove the front doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head
driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door under the
instrument panel by sliding the plastic panel along
the door frame toward the seats until the tabs are
detached.
Wiring Access Door
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring
harness.
Closed Wiring Harness
1 – Red Locking Tab
2 – Wiring Harness Lever (Closed Position)
5. Push and hold down the black security tab under
the wiring harness, and lift the harness lever into
the open position.
Open Wiring Harness
1 – Wiring Harness Lever (Open Position)
2 – Black Security Tab
6. With the wiring harness open, pull straight
downward on the wiring connector to unplug. Store
the wiring connector in the lower door basket.
7. With the door in the open position, remove the
check screw from the door check attachment on
the bodyside (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for
easier reinstallation. See the note later in this
section if the check arm gets pushed into the door
while the door is off.
Door Check Arm
8. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Install The Front Doors
1. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the
door, and lower them into the body hinges on the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used
to assist in guiding the door into place during
installation.
Hinge Pin Locations
2. With the door in the open position, align the door
check bracket with the hole on the bodyside. Insert
the check screw and tighten using a #40 Torx head
driver to 19.9 ft· lb (27.0 N·m).
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into
the body hinges. Tighten the screws using a #T50
Torx head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
NOTE:
If the check arm is stuck inside the door, follow these
instructions to install the check arm.
1. Insert the check arm screw into the check arm
bracket. Ensure the screw is in the correct
orientation.
2. Slowly pull on the screw to draw the check arm out
until you encounter increased resistance. Do not
attempt to pull the check arm all the way out.
3. While sitting inside the vehicle, hold the door
partially closed and insert the screw into the hole
on the body.
4. Using your fingers, turn the screw clockwise at
least two full turns. Gently pull on the screw to
ensure it is secure.
5. Using the door handle, slowly push the door open.
The check arm will be pulled out of the door. You
may hear the check arm pop against the screw.
6. Fully tighten the screw as instructed.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury be sure to keep your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects clear of the check arm
area during the removal and installation procedures.
CAUTION!
● Do not close the door before reattaching the door
check to the body. Damage may occur to the door
check.
● Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
● Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
Replacing The Wiring Connector Into The Wiring
Harness
To reinstall the wiring connector on the vehicle’s door
into the harness just inside the vehicle, proceed as
follows:
NOTE:
Make sure there is plenty of slack on the wiring
connector during installation. Close the door slightly to
provide more slack if needed.
1. With light finger pressure, seat the wiring
connector straight into the wiring harness until
the wiring harness lever starts to lower with the
latching pin.
Connecting The Wiring Harness
1 — Seat Connector Straight Into Harness
2 — Wiring Harness Lever Starts To Lower
CAUTION!
Failure to correctly reconnect the wiring
connector into the harness will result in damage
that is not covered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
2. After the harness lever has started to move with
the pressure of seating the wiring connector,
continue by lowering the wiring harness lever to
the fully closed position.
Fully Closed Position
3. Push the red locking tab downward to lock into
place.
4. Attach the cloth strap of the door onto the metal
hook just inside the vehicle.
Cloth Strap Attachment
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
5. Replace wiring access doors.
REAR DOOR REMOVAL (FOUR-DOOR
MODELS)
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only. Failure to follow this
warning can result in death or serious personal injury.
Door Removal Warning Label
WARNING!
● All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
ð
page 205.
● Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle,
as they may fly around and cause personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop, rough
terrain, or a collision.
NOTE:
● Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
● Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For off-road
driving tips, see
ð
page 205.
To remove the rear doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head
driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access
door from the bottom of the B-pillar.
Wiring Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness.
This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the
wiring connector to be unplugged.
Wiring Connector
6. With the door in the open position, remove the
check screw from the door check attachment on
the body (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for
easier reinstallation.
Door Check Arm
7. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in
the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling.
DOOR OFF MIRROR KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the Door Off Mirror Kit
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
If equipped with the Door Off Mirror Kit, exterior
rearview mirrors can be installed on to the upper body
door hinges after the front doors have been removed.
WARNING!
● All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
ð
page 205.
● Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle,
as they may fly around and cause personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop, rough
terrain, or a collision.
To install the Door Off Mirrors, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front doors see
ð
page 49.
Door Off Mirror
2. Remove the cowl bolt closest to the door opening
using a #40 Torx head driver, and store in a safe
location.
Cowl Bolt Location
3. Push the mirror bracket forward onto the A-pillar,
making sure to align the bottom of the bracket
with the upper door hinge, and the hole from the
removed cowl bolt.
Push Bracket Onto A-pillar
4. Place the bracket bushing behind the mirror
bracket (over the cowl bolt hole), then insert the
bracket bolt into the mirror bracket, through the
bracket bushing.
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
1 — Bracket Bushing
2 — Bracket Bolt
5. Insert the hinge shoulder bolt through the bottom
of the upper door hinge up into the mirror bracket,
then rotate the bracket knob toward the rear of the
vehicle to secure the mirror bracket to the A-pillar.
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
1 — Bracket Knob
2 — Hinge Shoulder Bolt
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Tighten both the bracket bolt and the hinge
shoulder bolt with a #40 Torx head driver.
Recommended torque specification for the bracket
bolt is 6 ft-lb (8 N·m), and 7.5 ft-lb (10 N·m) for the
hinge shoulder bolt.
7. Lower the mirror assembly onto the mirror bracket.
Lower Mirror Assembly Onto Bracket
8. Insert the three mirror screws into the mirror
assembly, and tighten into the mirror bracket using
a #30 Torx head driver. Recommended torque
specification for the mirror screws is 4 ft-lb (5.5
N·m).
Mirror Screw Locations
9. Repeat the steps on the other side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
If this kit is being installed with the optional lamp
bracket, the bracket bushing from step 4 is not needed.
Use the spacer from the lamp bracket.
HALF-DOOR INSTALLATION — IF EQUIPPED
Scan this QR code to learn more
about installing the half-door
CAUTION!
● Do not run half-doors through an automatic car
wash. This may result in scratches and wax
buildup on the windows.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Careless handling and storage of the half-doors
may damage the seals resulting in water leaks into
the interior of the vehicle.
● The upper half-doors must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water leaks into the interior of the vehicle.
● Store the zipper pulls of the upper half-door
windows at the upper B-pillar area for both front
and rear doors to avoid damage to the windows
when not in use.
● Do not attempt to operate the half-door zipper in
temperatures of 41°F (5°C) or below. Damage to
the window may occur.
This vehicle may be equipped with half-doors. To install
the half-doors in the vehicle, follow the instruction
sheet packaged in the box the doors were received in.
Replacement parts may be purchased through Mopar®
Service.
To install the front or rear half-doors, proceed as
follows:
1. Remove the full doors from the vehicle. For front
door removal, see
ð
page 49. For rear door
removal, see
ð
page 52.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
2. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the
lower half-door, and lower them into the body
hinges on the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used
to assist in guiding the door into place during
installation.
Lower Half-Door Hinge Pins
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into
the body hinges. Tighten the screws using a #T50
Torx head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
CAUTION!
● Do not close the door before reattaching the
door check to the body. Damage may occur to
the door check.
● Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to
the vehicle’s parts will occur.
● Hinge pins can break if overtightened during
door install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
4. Attach the cloth strap of the lower half-door to the
metal hook just inside the vehicle.
Cloth Strap Attachment
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
5. Connect the wiring harness on the lower half-door
to the connection just inside the vehicle.
NOTE:
For front doors, make sure the wiring harness is
closed completely.
Front Door Wiring Harness
1 — Open Wiring Harness
2 — Closed Wiring Harness
6. Replace wiring access doors.
7. When the half-doors are shipped with the vehicle,
the lower half-doors will have plugs in the post
holes that must be removed prior to upper half-
door installation. To remove these plugs, proceed
as follows:
a. Locate the service hole in the center of each
plug of the lower half-door (two on each front
and rear door).
b. Place a tool (hook tool or trim stick is
recommended) in the service hole.
Place Tool Into Service
Hole Of Plug To Remove
c. Using the tool, slowly pull upwards from the
center of the plug to remove.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
8. Making sure the window on the upper half-door
is completely zipped closed, insert the upper half-
door into the lower half-door by placing the posts
into the post holes.
Lower The Upper Half-Door Into Post Holes
9. Push down firmly on the inside of the upper half-
door until it is fully seated in the lower half.
Push Down To Fully Seat Upper Half-Door
Door Latch Alignment
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly set
the door almost to the closing position and check
how the door latch aligns with the body striker. Touch
condition between these components can result in
damage to both the door and the striker.
Check Door Latch And Striker Alignment
NOTE:
Only adjust the door to fit correctly against the striker.
DO NOT adjust the striker, as this could affect the
positioning of the full door.
If the door does not center align between the latch and
the striker, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
Hinge Bolt Locations
2. With the bolts loose, hold the door in the almost
closed position, and check that the latch and
striker align.
3. With the latch and striker aligned, proceed to close
the door softly and tighten the hinge bolts to 20.3
ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max Torque: 27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
Lower Door Adjustment
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly close
each door to check for body contact. Improper setting
of the door hinges can cause extreme non-uniform
conditions, and result in damage to the body around
the door.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
If the door does not latch properly after installation,
if there is interference between the panels, or if a non-
uniform gap around the door is observed when the door
is closed (example: door position appears to be low and
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
Hinge Bolt Locations
NOTE:
Do not adjust the body mounted hinges, or any
part of the door latch, as modifications to these
parts will affect installation of the full door.
2. With the bolts loose, the door can be moved
forward by pushing the door handle toward the
front of the vehicle, and/or upward by grabbing the
door handle and lifting towards the roof.
3. Once the gaps between the door and vehicle body
are uniform around the entire door, tighten the
door hinge bolts to 20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max
Torque: 27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
Upper Door Adjustment
After installation of the half-doors, if water leaks or wind
noise is observed, the seal of the upper half-door to the
door opening may need to be adjusted.
To determine if the upper half-door needs to be
adjusted, proceed as follows:
1. Determine which door is affected.
2. Open the affected door and hold a dollar-size
piece of paper along the top of the door opening
against the vehicle near where the leak/noise was
observed. Make sure half of the paper is above
the area where the door seal contacts the door
opening, while the other half is below.
3. Close the door on the paper, then pull the paper
upward. If the paper moves with little to no effort,
the upper half-door will need to be adjusted in that
area to increase seal compression.
Performing A Paper Test
There is another optional test that can be performed
using a flashlight and the help of another person.
One person should be inside the vehicle, and move the
flashlight around the periphery of the door seal, shining
outward. The other person should stand outside of the
vehicle and check for light passing by the seal. If light
is seen through the seal area, the door will need to be
adjusted.
To adjust the seal compression, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door and lift the upper half-door up and
away from the lower half. Lay the upper half-door
on a clean, dry surface.
2. Using an 8 mm open-end wrench (not provided),
loosen the nut located inside the bottom of the
upper half-door post, closest to where the “paper
test” detected a gap.
Nut Location Inside Bottom Of Post
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
too far rearward), the position of the door on its hinges
may need to be adjusted. To do this, proceed as follows:
3. Using a 3 mm Allen wrench (not provided), rotate
the screw on the side of the post counterclockwise
(while holding the wrench on the loosened bolt) to
increase the seal compression. If needed, rotate
clockwise to reduce seal compression.
Rotate Screw For Seal Compression
1 — 3 mm Allen Wrench
2 — 8 mm Open-End Wrench
4. Tighten the nut inside the bottom of the post using
the wrench and make sure the screw head is flush
to the post. Reinstall the upper half-door.
Screw Head Flush To Post
5. Close the door and repeat the “paper test”. Repeat
the adjustment procedure if needed.
6. If needed, add the provided shim to a lower half-
door pocket to seal the upper half-door to the roof:
a. Lift upper half-door up and away from lower
half.
b. Clean the bottom of the door pocket.
Remove Upper Half-Door &
Clean Bottom Of Door Pocke
t
c. Slide the shim onto a pencil or similar tool.
d. Remove the paper backing from the adhesive
side of the shim and place the shim with
pencil into the pocket.
e. Press the shim firmly to the bottom of the
pocket, and remove the pencil once the shim
is firmly in place.
Press Shim Firmly Into Bottom Of Pocket
1 — Remove Paper Backing From Shim
2 — Slide Pencil through Hole In Shim
3 — Press Pencil With Shim Into Pocket
f. Replace upper half-door.
NOTE:
If the compression is increased too much on the front
upper corner of the rear doors, deformation of the seal
will occur.
Half-Door Removal
To remove the half-doors, repeat the installation steps
in reverse order.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
NOTE:
When removing the upper half-doors, push upward
firmly on the middle of the upper half-door until the
posts detach from the lower half.
Push Upward On Middle Of
Upper Half Door To Remov
e
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located on the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the control handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once the
heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay
on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within
the Uconnect system and, if equipped, on the
instrument panel below the radio. You can access the
button through the Climate or Controls menu of the
touchscreen.
● Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 42.
WARNING!
● Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions
must exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
● Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
steering wheel covers of any type or material. This
may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
● It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
POWER ADJUSTMENT F
RONT SEATS — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's
seat and/or power passenger seat. The power seat
switch and power seat recliner switch are located on
the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the
power seat switch to adjust seat height, angle, or
forward/rearward position. Use the power seat recline
switch to adjust the angle of the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the
seat switch and the front of the seat cushion will move
in the direction of the switch.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and
rearward. Push the power recline switch forward or
rearward. The seatback will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the
lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the
switch will raise and lower the position of the support.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
Power Lumbar Switch
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
FRONT SEATS — IF
EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using
a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the
floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located
under the seat cushion and move the seat forward
or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Adjustment Bar Location
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by
using the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard
side of the seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise
the seat, push downward on the handle to lower the
seat. Several strokes may be necessary to achieve the
desired position.
Seat Height Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean
forward or backward, depending on the direction you
would like the seatback to move. Release the strap
when the desired position is reached and the seatback
will lock into place.
Recline Strap
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Lumbar Support
The lumbar control knob is located on the outboard
side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control forward
to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Knob
Front Easy Entry Seat — Two Door Models
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the
outboard side of the seatback, and slide the entire seat
forward.
Easy Entry Lever
To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the seatback
upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until
the track locks.
NOTE:
● Front seats equipped with power adjustment will not
be equipped with an easy entry lever.
● The front seats (if equipped with manual
adjustment) have a track memory, which returns the
seat to its original position.
● The recline strap and easy entry lever should not be
used during the automatic returning of the seat to its
sitting position.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT REAR SEATS
WARNING!
Do not place luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four
Door Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
NOTE:
● Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
● The center head restraints must be in the lowest
position to avoid contact with the center console
when folding the seat.
WARNING!
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TO FOLD DOWN THE REAR SEAT
There are two release levers located on each upper
outboard side of the rear seat. The larger of the
two release levers folds down the seat and the head
restraint simultaneously. The smaller lever folds down
the head restraint independently for improved visibility.
To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release lever
and slowly fold down the seatback. The head restraint
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
will fold automatically with the seat when this lever is
pulled.
Seatback Release Lever
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded
for an extended period of time. This is normal. By
simply unfolding the seats to the open position, the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape over time.
TO RAISE THE REAR SEAT
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then,
raise the head restraint until it locks into place. If
interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback
from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the
seat to its proper position.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
(Continued)
WARNING!
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Flip And Fold Rear Seat — Hybrid Only
The 60/40 split rear seat can be folded down for added
cargo space. To fold the rear seat, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the seat cushion by grabbing the outer edges
of the cushion and pulling upward.
Lift Seat Cushion
2. Flip the seat cushion up and forward.
Flip Seat Bottom Forward
3. Pull the seatback release lever upward fully
(located on the outboard side of the rear
seatback).
Lift Seatback Release Lever Up
NOTE:
Pulling the lever partway will fold the head
restraint forward. Pulling it all the way up will
release the seatback.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Fold the seatback forward against the floor.
Fold Seatback Down
5. Repeat on the other side if desired.
To Raise The R
ear Seat
1. Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
2. Raise the head restraint until it locks into place.
3. Return the seat cushion to its original position.
WARNING!
● Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely locked
into position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do not store items on top of the battery
underneath the seat cushion. The rear seat
bottom must not have any obstruction that
prevents it from being in the fully lowered position,
otherwise the bottom may not lock during frontal
impact. If the seat cushion is not fully lowered,
serious injury could occur.
FOLD AND TUMBLE REAR SEAT — TWO
DOOR
MODELS
NOTE:
● Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
● Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
Folding The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the
seatback forward.
Rear Seatback Release Lever
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Using The Retention Straps
1. There are two retention straps located on the
back of the rear seat and two corresponding
wire loops located on the back of each B-pillar.
Open the hook-and-loop fastener on the strap and
thread through the wire loop. Fold the hook-and-
loop fastener over to keep the seat in the folded
position. This should be done on both sides.
Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
2. To return the seat to its normal upright position,
reverse these steps.
Removing The Rear Seat
1. Push down on the release bar on each side, and
pull the seat out and away from the lower bracket.
Release Bar Location
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse these steps.
NOTE:
Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching the rear
seat latches.
WARNING!
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
● In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure that the seats
are fully latched.
REAR SEAT ARMREST — IF
EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a
rear armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull
strap under the head restraint and pull it forward.
Rear Seat Armrest
NOTE:
The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
UNFOLDING THE REAR ARMREST — HYBRID
ONL
Y
Raise the rear center head restraint, then pull the rear
armrest tab to release it from the seat and pull forward.
Pull the rear armrest tab to release it from the seat and
pull forward.
Armrest Tab Location
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a
rear armrest with cupholders.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED SEATS — IF
EQUIPPED
The heated seat control buttons are located
on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen and also in the Climate Control
touchscreen menu.
● Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
NOTE:
● The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
● The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 42.
WARNING!
● Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
The release button does not need to be pushed to
adjust the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the adjustment button and the release
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push downward.
Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
● A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death
to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
● ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
WARNING!
the reinstallation instructions prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door
Models
The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable, but
foldable head restraints.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the release
strap located on the upper outboard side of each rear
seat.
Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Locations
Rear Head Restraints Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift
up on the head restraint until it locks into place.
For information on child seat tether routing, see
ð
page 252.
WARNING!
● Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat
head restraints installed while passengers are
occupying the rear seat. In a collision, people
riding in this area without the head restraints
installed are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
● A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death
to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
● ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
(Continued)
WARNING!
the reinstallation instructions prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door
Models
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but
foldable, outboard head restraints, as well as an
adjustable, removable center head restraint.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the inner
release lever, located on the upper part of the rear
seat.
Rear Head Restraint Lever
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraint Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift
up on the head restraint until it locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head
restraint. To lower the center head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, push the release
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
pull upward on the head restraint.
To install the head restraint, hold the release button
while pushing downward on the head restraint. For
information on child seat tether routing, see
ð
page
252.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact with
the center console when folding the seat down.
WARNING!
● Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat
head restraints installed while passengers are
occupying the rear seat. In a collision, people
riding in this area without the head restraints
installed are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
● A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death
to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
● ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the reinstallation instructions prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s
Voice Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
or say the vehicle’s Wake Up
word “Hey Uconnect”. The factory default Wake Up word
is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
through the Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
● “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
● “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
● “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The
VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
● Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise that
may impact recognition.
● Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
● Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command.
● You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with Voice Recognition,
you may still have the Phone and VR buttons. These
buttons will work with Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay®.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send
Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, Navigation, And Climate Functions
3 — Push To End Call
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2024 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to
the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position
(toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when the
vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through Uconnect Settings
ð
page 211.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the cover.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
Outside Rearview Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger
side convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side mirror.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
SIGNAL — IF
EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper
outer corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with
the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the door panel
next to the door handle.
Power Mirror Switch
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust
a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to
select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated whenever
you turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped)
ð
page 79.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
Scan this QR code to learn more
about HomeLink
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
● HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered
by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
● The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
● To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with
each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
● The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active
ð
page 371.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device that is being programmed
to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held
transmitter is programmed to activate the device you
are trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A ROLLING
CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A GARAGE
DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to 3
inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want
to program while you push and hold the garage
door opener transmitter button you are trying to
replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the garage door opener motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling
code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
● Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
● Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can
cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO
A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
ð
page 72.
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code,
or non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner. The procedure may need to be performed
multiple times to successfully pair the device to your
HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK®
BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step
2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish
to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink®
has successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly
when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It
may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases.
The garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
● If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage door/
device should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pushed.
● To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after 20
seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
● Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
● Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
● Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or visit HomeLink.com for
information or assistance.
WARNING!
● Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transmitter with a
garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse”
feature as required by Federal safety standards.
This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if
equipped), instrument panel lights, interior lights, and
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
1 — Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control (If Equipped)
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Fog Light Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
1 — Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control (If Equipped)
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Fog Light Switch
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
is engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
The taillights and license plate light are also turned on
when the headlight switch is on. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light,
and instrument panel light operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
parking lights, and instrument panel lights. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights are active when the low
beams are not on, and the engine is running. DRLs may
be deactivated by applying the parking brake.
NOTE:
● For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
● On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side),
or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard
warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. The
lever will return to the centered position. To return
the headlights to low beam, pull the lever toward the
steering wheel, or push the lever toward the instrument
panel.
Multifunction Lever
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
HEADLAMP CONTROL
— IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automatically controlling the high beams through the
use of a camera mounted on the vehicle’s header. This
camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
● The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto High
Beam” within your Uconnect Settings
ð
page 211,
as well as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO
position and placing the multifunction lever in the
high beam position.
● Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the
vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on
the windshield or camera lens will cause the system
to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system
on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last
detent for automatic headlight operation. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also
on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF
position. To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a
chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the parking
lights or low beam headlights and push the fog light
switch. Pushing the fog light switch a second time will
turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COUR
TESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights will turn on when the front doors are
opened, by rotating the dimmer control on the headlight
switch fully upward, or, if equipped, when the unlock
button is pushed on the key fob.
The interior courtesy lights are located in the center of
the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one large center
light and four smaller reading lights. Each reading light
can be turned on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens
a second time will turn the light off.
Dome Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom
position will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This
allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
DIMMER CONTR
OL
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and
is located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness
of the instrument panel lights. Rotating the dimmer
control will also adjust the interior and ambient light
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
levels (e.g. courtesy lights in the footwell, illuminated
cupholders, and front door handles).
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers
are operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of
the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Windshield Wiper/Washer Operation
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation (If Equipped)
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
NOTE:
Prior to activating the wiper system, manually
clear excessive and unusually heavy snow/ice from
windshield and cowl area.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent past the intermittent settings for high-
speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage
to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever
to the first detent position for one of four intermittent
settings. The delay cycle can be set anywhere between
1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate
for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released.
Then, the intermittent interval previously selected will
resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the
wipers will turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the washer will resume normal
operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing
of the windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single
wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. As long as the lever is held up, the wipers will
continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The washer function must be used in order
to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
ð
page 310.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
— IF
EQUIPPED
A rotary switch on the center portion of the windshield
wiper/washer lever controls the operation of the rear
wiper/washer function.
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
Push the wiper lever toward the instrument
panel to activate the rear washer. The
washer pump and wiper will continue to
operate as long as the lever is held.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the washer will resume normal
operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return
to the parked position. When the vehicle is restarted,
the wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12.3-inch
Display Automatic Climate Contr
ols
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX
A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is
on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on. In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other
settings will cause the MAX A/C to turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The
A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
The A/C button allows the operator to manually activate
or deactivate the A/C system. When the A/C system is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the
outlets into the cabin.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions,
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The
A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
the mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may
automatically adjust to optimize customer experience
for warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press
and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate. AUTO will achieve and maintain
your desired temperature by automatically adjusting
the blower speed and air distribution. Air Conditioning
(A/C) may be active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended for
efficiency. You can press and release this button on
the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate,
to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when
AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system
to switch between manual mode and automatic mode
ð
page 81.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change the
current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The
Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost
is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected,
the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling
the front defrost mode button, the climate system
returns to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button
on the touchscreen, or push and release
the button on the faceplate, to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10
minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
● Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
● Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window.
● Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up
And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent
temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only
appear if your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic
Climate Control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The
SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC
is on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the Climate Control system.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
● Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
● Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce
the blower setting and the large blower icon to
increase the blower setting. The blower can also be
selected by pressing the blower bar area between
the icons.
Mode Control
Select one of the Mode buttons on the
touchscreen or press the Mode button
on the faceplate to adjust the airflow
distribution. The airflow distribution can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air
is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the
faceplate to turn the Climate Control ON/
OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) —
IF EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level,
it is not necessary to change the settings. You
will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
● It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
● The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customer-
programmable feature within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 211.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC
display will be turned off when the system is being used
in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
● “Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
● “Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system
is functioning properly and the proper amount, type,
and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the
Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
ð
page 353.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
The following chart is for Manual Override Operation.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to flush
out the hot air. Adjust the con-
trols as needed to achieve com-
fort.
Warm Weather Turn
(A/C) on and set the
mode control to (Panel
Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid Con-
ditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and turn (A/C)
on to keep windows clear.
Cold Weather Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield fog-
ging starts to occur, move the
control to (Mix Mode).
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glove
compartment open may result in injury in a collision.
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower
storage compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, lift the top
latch. To access the lower storage compartment, lift the
bottom latch.
Console Storage Latches
1 — Upper Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Compartment Latch
Console Storage Lock
If equipped, the center console storage may have a
locking mechanism.
Rear Storage Compartment — If
Equipped
The rear cargo area storage compartment is located
underneath the load floor.
To access the storage compartment, lift up on the cargo
strap/handle at the rear of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Cover (Four Door Models)
Rear Storage Cover (Two Door Models)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
2
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped
with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for
the front passengers. The light ring is controlled by the
dimmer control
ð
page 77.
USB/AUX CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel,
below the climate controls. Behind the media hub
access door, the Media Hub contains one AUX port,
a Type C USB port and one standard USB port. Both
USB ports allow you to play music from MP3 players,
smartphones or USB devices through the vehicle’s
sound system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to Android
Auto™ or Apple Carplay® in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your
device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off.
NOTE:
● Once a device is connected to the USB port, it
will begin charging and is ready for use with the
system. Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports
can be used at the same time but cannot be used
simultaneously while playing media. When both Type
C and Type A charge-only USB ports are in use they
will be charged at a reduced rate.
● Both ports share a single data connection. The user
cannot switch between Type A or Type C.
Media Hub
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
Located inside the center console, a second USB port
allows you to play music from USB devices through your
vehicle’s sound system.
Third and fourth USB ports (if equipped) are located
behind the center console, above the power inverter.
Both ports are charge only.
USB On The Back Of The Center Console
When a new device or smartphone is plugged into
the USB ports, the following message may display
depending on the device being utilized:
● “A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost.”
● “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
● “Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device while
driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in a
collision.
POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets
that can provide power for accessories designed for use
with the standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is
powered from the ignition switch. Power is available
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC
position.
Front Power Outlet
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a
second power outlet located in the rear cargo area and
is powered directly from the vehicle’s battery.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Power Outlets Fuse Locations
1 — F43 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery
powered at all times)
2 — F45 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC
position)
CAUTION!
● Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13
Amp) at 12 Volt. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
● Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
● Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
CAUTION!
● Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
● After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must
be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
● Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current to
AC current.
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 W, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF E
QUIPPED
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank
of the instrument panel can be used to power various
electrical devices. You have the ability to configure the
functionality of the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect
Settings
ð
page 211.
All switches can be configured as follows:
● Switch type operation: Latching or Momentary
● Power source: Battery or Ignition
● Ability to hold last state across key cycles: On or Off
Auxiliary Switches
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type
is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power
four blunt cut wires. These wires are located under the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment and
under the hood to the right, near the battery.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood Auxiliary Switch Connections
– Under Instrument Panel
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right
side near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right
side near battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right
side near battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right
side near battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused
battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the
interior, in the passenger side under the instrument
panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided
with the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/
installation of your electrical devices.
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power window switches are located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls. Push the
switch downward to open the window and upward to
close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window and
the top right switch controls the right front window.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not let children play with power windows.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger
window, and the lower right switch controls the right
rear passenger window.
NOTE:
There are window switches located on the rear of the
center console for the rear passenger windows in the
four-door model.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power and the passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down to the second detent and release,
and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch allows you to disable
the window controls on the rear passenger doors.
To disable the window controls, rotate the switch
downward. To enable the window controls, rotate the
switch upward.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the Power Sliding Top (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If
the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or
open any window.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WRANGLER TOPS
PROVIDED TOOLS
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with
your vehicle located in the center console. This kit
includes the necessary tools required for the operations
described in the following sections. All pieces fit into
the ratchet for easy use.
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used
independently. Your vehicle warranty will not cover
damage resulting from both tops being installed at the
same time.
Provided Tools
1 — Ratchet
2 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
3 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
4 — 15 mm Socket
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top (four door
models only), the soft top system will be provided in
a separate box located in the rear of the vehicle for
shipping purposes only.
LOWERING THE SOFT TOP INTO SUNRIDER®
POSITION
Scan this QR code to learn more
about lowering the soft top
WARNING!
● The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are
designed only for protection against the elements.
Do not rely on them to contain occupants within
the vehicle or to protect against injury during an
accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
● Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft tops.
The lift assist mechanism and side bows may
cause serious injury if fingers or hands get caught
in between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building,
hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc.
Also, it was not designed as a structural member
(Continued)
CAUTION!
of the vehicle and, thus, cannot properly carry
any additional loads other than environmental (rain,
snow, etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the
top has been folded down for a period of time, the
top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it,
making it difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural
contraction of the vinyl or acrylic materials of the fabric
top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the
top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size
and the top can then be installed. If the temperature
is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top
down or roll the rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
● Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may
result.
● Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
● Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
● Do not fully lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may occur.
● For important information on cleaning and caring
for your vehicle's fabric top
ð
page 355.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
2
CAUTION!
● Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry
or force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers
securing the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft
top framework when opening or closing. Damage
to the top may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
● It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet may
allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
● The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four Door Side View Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5 — #5 Bow
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
2
Two Door Side View Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5 — #5 Bow
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Two And Four Door Rear Components
1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
NOTE:
● All lowering and raising the soft top instructions are
applicable to both two and four door model vehicles.
● Images shown are of four door models, and
appearance of two door model components may
differ.
The following options are available to you when
lowering your vehicle’s soft top:
● Sunrider® position with rear and quarter windows
installed
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
● Sunrider® position with rear window installed and
quarter panels removed
● Fully lowered position with rear and quarter windows
removed
Both quarter windows should be removed and installed
together.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar by
pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook
is disengaged from its receiver.
Step Two
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the #1
Bow of the soft top to start the operation.
Step Three
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the
side link to fold the soft top rearward into the
Sunrider® position.
Step Four
NOTE:
If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider® position,
secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Step Four
NOTE:
● The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® position
with the rear window and quarter panel assemblies
fully installed or completely removed.
● The rear window and rear quarter windows must
be removed before fully lowering the soft top to
prevent damage to the top. Clean the side and
rear windows before removal to assist in preventing
scratching during removal of the soft top. If the
plastic retainers are difficult to operate due to road
dust, etc., clean them with a mild soap solution
and a small brush. Cleaning products are available
through an authorized dealer.
Removing The Soft Top Windows
NOTE:
Before fully lowering the soft top, the rear window and
rear quarter windows must be removed.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● Sunrider® position with rear and quarter panels
removed
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear
window’s plastic retainers from the lower right and
left corners.
Step One
2. Grab the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and
upward releasing it from both the right and left
retainers.
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
3. While holding the window in place, slide the swing
gate bar to the left separating it from the rear
window. Store in soft window bag (if equipped), or
a safe location.
Step Three
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both quarter
window pillars.
Step Four
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to the
left until it is completely separate from its retainer.
Do not pull downward while removing the rear
window. Damage to the retainer could result.
Step Five
Remove The Right And Left Quar
ter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom corner
outward and release tab from the bottom of the
window pillar.
Step One
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
2
2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at the
upper front corner of each quarter window.
Step Two
3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove plastic
retainer from along the bottom of the window
moving toward the front of the vehicle.
Step Three
4. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to the top
of the front window.
Step Four
5. While keeping the window level, slide rearward
until it is completely separate from its retainer.
Do not pull downward while removing the window.
Damage to the retainer could result.
Step Five
6. Store in soft window bag (if equipped) or a safe
location.
NOTE:
For information on the use of the storage bag,
refer to the next section.
Soft Top Window Storage Bag — If
Equipped
To safely store the soft top rear window, and rear
quarter windows, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
The swing gate bar, once removed from the rear
window, does not store in the soft window storage bag
(if equipped).
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. With the bag opened completely, fold both fabric
dividers downward and lay the first quarter window
all the way to the right side with the inside of the
window facing downward and the window pillar to
the outside.
NOTE:
The quarter windows are marked “1” and “2” on
the inside of the window pillar.
Step One
Step One
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Both Dividers Folded Down
2. Fold the first divider upward, covering the first
quarter window.
Step Two
3. Lay the second quarter window on top of the first
divider all the way to the left side with the inside of
the window facing downward and the window pillar
to the outside.
Step Three
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Second Divider Folded Down
4. Fold the second divider upward, covering the
second quarter window.
Step Four
5. Lay the rear window on top of the second divider.
Step Five
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
2
6. Close the storage bag and store in a safe location.
Step Six
Lowering The Soft Top All The Way
1. Remove the rear window and quarter panel
windows
ð
page 94.
2. From the Sunrider® position
ð
page 89, remove
straps if previously secured and move to the rear
of the vehicle.
3. Locate the Sunrider® latch beneath the #6 Bow of
the soft top on the left side.
Step Three
4. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow the soft
top to slide rearward freely in the guide tracks to
the stowed position.
Step Four
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
5. While pushing downward slightly on the folded soft
top, slide the lock lever on the left and right side
lift assist mechanisms to the “lock” position.
Step Five (Locked Position)
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Once the lock lever is in the “lock” position, push
downward on each side of the folded soft top to
ensure it is secure. An audible “click” may be
heard.
Step Six
NOTE:
Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Step Six
RAISING THE SOFT TOP
Raising The Soft Top
Scan this QR code to learn more
about how to raise the sof
t top
From The Fully Lowered Position
1. From the fully lowered position, remove straps if
previously secured.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
2. While pushing down on the rear of the top, slide
the lock lever on the left and right side lift assist
mechanisms to the “unlock” position.
Step Two
3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along
the guide track until it locks into the Sunrider®
position with an audible “click”.
Step Three
1 — Unlocked Position
2 — #5 Bow Location
4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure the
top is locked in the Sunrider® position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
2
5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top
toward the front of the vehicle manually guiding
the top into the closed position.
Step Five
Step Five
6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the
header latch downward to engage the hook into its
receiver. Repeat on the other side.
Step Six
7. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the
hook, locking the latch into place.
Step Seven
Installing The Soft Top Windows
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of the
window into the retainer and slide forward while
keeping the window level. Repeat on the other
side.
Step One
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into the
top cover, and insert the bottom tab into the clip.
Step Two
Step Two
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install steps
could result in damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
3. Engage the retainers on the front of the windows,
ensuring they are fully engaged, followed by the
retainers along the bottom of the windows.
Step Three
1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window
2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
before the vehicle resumes motion.
4. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper
front corner of each quarter window by pressing
firmly.
Step Four
Install The Rear Window
1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from left to
right while keeping the window level.
Step One
2. Insert the swing gate bar into the retainers at the
bottom of the window from left to the right.
Step Two
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
2
3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right
side retainers.
Step Three
4. Line up the rear window to the right side quarter
window first, and engage the plastic retainers.
5. Repeat with the left side quarter window.
Step Five
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right
and left corners.
Step Six
NOTE:
For information on removing your soft top, refer to the
next section.
REMOVING THE SOFT TOP
Scan this QR code to learn more
about how to remove the sof
t top
1. Fully lower the soft top
ð
page 98.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on both the
left and right sides are in the “lock” position,
and an audible “click” is heard when pushing
down on the #1 bow from each of the lift assist
mechanisms before removing.
Step Two
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head screws on each
lift assist mechanism, then lift the mechanism up
and away from the vehicle.
Step Three
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail rearward to
release the side link from the track.
Step Four
Step Four
5. Repeat on the opposite side.
6. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and away
from the vehicle, careful to avoid the vehicle’s
sport bar, trim, and tire carrier. Store the soft top in
a safe, clean, and dry location.
Step Six
7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the Torx screw on both rear
corners of the vehicle, removing the retainers.
Step Seven
INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP
1. If currently installed, remove the hard top
ð
page 109.
2. Install the door rails, starting with the front,
followed by the rear on each side. For instructions
and appropriate torque specifications for the door
rail Torx screws
ð
page 117.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
2
3. Install the rear retainers on each side of the rear
of the vehicle using the provided #50 Torx head
driver and ratchet. Refer to the following table for
recommended torque specifications.
Step Three
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx screws. Damage to the
retainers will occur.
Torque Specifi-
cation For Torx
Screw
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
4. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in the
“lock” position, lift the soft top into the rear of
the vehicle with the side links pointing toward the
front. Lower the lift assist mechanisms onto its
retainers on both sides (on the inside of the sport
bar).
Step Four
Step Four
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, tighten the Torx screws by turning them
clockwise. Secure them until they are snug (refer
to the following table for recommended torque
specifications), being careful not to cross-thread
the screws or overtighten. Repeat on the
opposite side.
Step Five
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
Torque Specifi-
cation For Torx
Screws
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. While pulling the release lever on the top of the rail
rearward, place the side link into the guide track
on the top of the rail then release the lever.
Step Six
7. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This
cover should be discarded. It was intended as a
protective cover for shipping only.
8. Raise the soft top
ð
page 99.
NOTE:
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the
top.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S) REMOVAL
Scan this QR code to learn more
about how to remove the hard top
CAUTION!
● The hard top is not designed to carry any
additional loads, such as after-market roof racks,
spare tires, building materials, hunting or camping
supplies, etc. For optional Mopar® accessory roof
racks
ð
page 124.
● Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the front header, sport bar,
and body side or fully removed.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
● It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening
a door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
● The hard top assembly must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
● Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
● The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
2
Four Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel 2 — Left Side Panel 3 — Hard Top
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Two Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel 2 — Left Side Panel 3 — Hard Top
NOTE:
● All hard top removal and installation instructions are
applicable to both two and four door model vehicles.
● Images shown are of four door models, and
appearance of two door model components may
differ.
● The left side panel must be removed before
removing the right side panel.
To remove the hard top front panel(s), proceed as
follows:
1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left side
panel (one at the front, the rear, and outside),
unlocking them from the roof.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
2
Step Two
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch located at
the top of the windshield.
Step Three
1 — Header Panel Latched
2 — Unlatched Position
4. Remove the left side panel.
5. Repeat the previous steps to remove the right side
panel.
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag — If
Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you to
store your hard top panels. The storage bag contains
two compartments.
Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down so the
loops and hooks are facing upward. Unzip the bag and
fold back the outer flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to inserting
the panel into the panels bag.
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the bag with
the latches facing upward.
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider
is lying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into the
bag with the latches facing downward.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to
inserting the panel into the bag.
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top bag
closed.
Step Four
5. Lift the Freedom Top bag into the vehicle with the
hooks and straps facing the back of the rear seat.
Attach the clip at the bottom of the bag to the
child restraint anchorage, located at the base of
the rear seat.
6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head
restraints and loop the strap through the buckle.
Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom Top bag
securely against the rear seat.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S) INSTALLATION
1. Open the header latch inside the vehicle, and the
three L-shaped locks on each panel.
2. Set the right side panel on the windshield frame
with the locating pin in the front receiver mounting
hole followed by the left side panel, making sure
there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the
panels are sitting flush with the body.
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for
removal in reverse order.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top panels
should be clear of any dust and debris prior to
reinstallation.
REMOVING THE HARD TOP
1. Remove both front panels
ð
page 105.
2. Open both front doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, remove the two Torx head screws that
secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top
of the front doors).
Step Three
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the
hard top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside
— three screws on each side) using the #50 Torx
head driver.
Step Four
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure
clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the rear
window glass.
Step Five
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on the
left rear inside corner of the vehicle.
Step Six
7. Release the locking tab by pushing it downward.
Step Seven
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
2
8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab inward
while pulling downward to disconnect.
Step Eight
Step Eight
9. To remove the washer hose, push the release
button on hose connector, and pull downward.
Step Nine
10. Store the wire harness and washer hose in
the compartment below the trim. To access the
storage compartment, lift the trim cover as shown.
Step Ten
11. Secure the wire harness within the compartment
by plugging it into the receptacle and reengaging
the locking tab.
Step Eleven
12. Secure the washer hose by snapping it in next
to the receptacle, then replace the compartment
cover.
Step Twelve
13. Lower the rear window, and close the swing gate.
14. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the
hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The removal of the rear Hard Top requires four adults,
one located on each corner. Failure to follow this
caution could damage the Hard Top.
INSTALLING THE HARD TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top usage,
they must be removed prior to installation of the hard
top. For removal procedures, see
ð
page 116.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the vehicle
while making sure that the top is sitting flush with the
body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a
uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top. Then
follow the removal steps in reverse order.
NOTE:
● Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
● The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to
the body should be torqued as follows using the
provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet:
○ Hard top to B-pillar: 119 in-lb +/- 23 in-lb (13.5
N·m +/- 2.7 N·m)
○ Hard top to J-rail: 154 in-lb +/- 30 in-lb (17.5 N·m
+/- 3.5 N·m)
SUNRIDER® FOR HARD TOP
WARNING!
Do not open or close the Sunrider® top while driving.
Operating the top while driving could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
The Sunrider® soft top can be used in place of the
Hard Top Freedom Panels for quick and easy opening of
the area above the driver and front passenger seats.
Sunrider® For Hard Top
To install the Sunrider® soft top, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front Hard Top Freedom panels
ð
page 105.
2. With the help of a second person, set the
Sunrider® top onto the top of the vehicle making
sure to align the holes at the front and rear of the
side rails.
Lower Sunrider® Onto The Vehicle
3. Swing the front frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the door rail attachment bolt
(provided bolt without spacer) from underneath.
Tighten with a #40 Torx head driver until snug.
Attach Front Door Rail Bolt
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
2
4. Insert the rear door rail attachment bolt (provided
bolt with spacer) from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until snug.
Attach Rear Door Rail Bolt
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 on the other side of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the
front and rear door rail attachment bolts is 8.8 ft-lb
(12 N·m).
6. Attach the rear clamp at the rear center of the
Sunrider® top using the two provided rear clamp
attachment bolts. Tighten with #40 Torx head
driver until snug.
Rear Clamp Location
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the rear
clamp attachment bolts is 3.7 ft-lb (5 N·m).
7. From inside the vehicle, lift and pull the Sunrider®
top forward using the integrated handle on the
front header of the top. Manually guide the top into
the closed position.
Push Sunrider® Top Forward
8. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the
header latch downward to engage the hook into
its receiver. Pull the handle back upward while
squeezing the hook, locking the latch into place.
Repeat on the other side.
Engage Both Header Latches
To Open The Sunrider® Top
To open the Sunrider® top, proceed as follows:
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar by
pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook
is disengaged from its receiver.
Release Both Header Latches
3. From the front of the Sunrider® top, lift and push
the top rearward to the Sunrider® position.
Sunrider® Position
4. Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided with the Sunrider® kit, and
wrap one around the side rails on each side of
the Sunrider® top to hold it in place.
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Placement
POWER SLIDING TOP
— IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recommended in
vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top. Damage
will occur to the top as well as the header seal.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the
control switch can be found on the front trim panel, to
the right of the driver’s side sun visor.
Power Sliding Top Control Switch
1 — Open Switch
2 — Close Switch
NOTE:
● The power top is non-removable. If desired, the rear
quarter windows can be removed and stored in the
provided storage bag
ð
page 115.
● The power top will not open in temperatures below
-4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened at a higher
temperature, it can be closed at temperatures above
-40°F (-40°C).
● The power top will not operate at vehicle speeds
above 60 mph (96 km/h).
NOTE:
A slight pause in audio may be heard when opening
and closing the Power Sliding Top as a result of the
Uconnect system switching between power top Closed
and power top Open audio modes.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
2
WARNING!
● Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. Do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by
the power top while operating the power top
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
● In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open power top. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
● Do not allow small children to operate the power
top. Never allow your fingers, other body parts,
or any object, to project through the power top
opening. Injury may result.
Opening And Closing The Power Top
Express Open/Close
Push the open switch and release it within one-half
second and the power top will open automatically from
any position. The power top will open fully and stop
automatically.
Push the close switch and release it within one-half
second and the power top will close automatically from
any position. The power top will close fully and stop
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the power top switch will stop the
power top.
Manual Open/Close
To open the power top manually, push and hold the
open switch to the full open position, then release.
To close the power top manually, push and hold the
close switch to the fully closed position, then release.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the power top movement. The top
will remain in a partially opened position until the
switch is operated and held again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening
of the power top during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the power top is detected,
the power top will automatically retract. Remove the
obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the close switch
and release to Express Close.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the power top
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the top’s path before closing.
NOTE:
● The Power Sliding Top may reverse motion if closing
during a severe headwind. If this occurs, push and
hold the Power Sliding Top switch again to close the
top completely.
● If three consecutive power top close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable
and the power top must be closed in Manual Mode.
Power Top Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the quarter window glass panel. For important
information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle
ð
page 354.
Ignition Off Operation
The power top switch can remain active in Accessory
Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes after the
vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect
system
ð
page 211.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is a
relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the power
top when the “Express Mode” stops working. To reset
the power top, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and start
the vehicle.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to perform the relearn
procedure.
2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed position.
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and hold the Close switch for 10 seconds.
This will put the power top into calibration mode.
4. Continue holding down the close button while the
top goes fully open and then back to fully close.
5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully closed
position, release the close button. The power top is
now reset and ready to use.
NOTE:
If the close button is released anytime during the
relearning process, the relearn may not be complete,
and the procedure must be repeated.
Rear Quarter Window Removal
On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the
rear quarter windows can be removed. To remove these
windows, follow this procedure:
1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear window.
2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter
windows.
3. Locate the rear quarter window latches (two on
each window) on the interior of the windows.
4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwise to
release.
5. Rotate the right hand side latch counterclockwise
to release.
Step Five
1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise
2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise
6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each window
upward and away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not pull down or apply any weight to the
windows after the latches are released. Damage
could result to the pins holding the windows in
place.
Step Six
Step Six
7. Store the rear quarter windows in the provided
storage bag and keep in a safe location, or
securely fasten the bag to the rear seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
2
Quarter Window Storage Bag
To use the storage bags for the rear quarter windows,
proceed as follows:
1. With the bag completely open and the fabric
divider raised, place the first quarter window with
the latches facing outward into the foam insert.
Fold divider over the window once placed inside.
Step One
1 — Bag Open With Divider Raised
2 — Lower Divider Over Window (Latches Facing
Outward)
2. Place the second window into the foam insert with
the latches facing outward. Fully close the bag.
NO
TE:
Once both windows are placed inside the bag, the
outside of the windows will be facing each other
with all latches facing the outside of the bag.
Step Two
1 — Second Window Placed Over Divider
2 — Fully Closed Bag
3. Store the bag in a safe location, or in the cargo
area of the vehicle by securing the bag in the
vehicle’s cargo area. This is done by attaching
the straps at the top of the bag to the rear head
restraints, as well as attaching the clip at the
bottom of the bag to the forward most cargo hook
on the load floor.
Step Three
WARNING!
In a collision, unsecured rear quarter windows in the
vehicle could cause injury. They could fly around in a
sudden stop or rough terrain and strike someone in
the vehicle. Do not store the rear quarter windows in
the vehicle without securing them as instructed here.
DOOR FRAME
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection
that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
● Opening a door or lowering a window while the top
is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's
interior.
● Careless handling and storage of the removable
door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
● The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
NOTE:
In four door models, the rear door frames must be
removed first, followed by the front door frames.
1. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, loosen the Torx screws located on the
underside of each door frame (two per door).
Door Frame Screw Locations
2. Once all the way loosened, remove the screws by
pulling downward.
NOTE:
Screws will not fall out once completely loose, as
they are held in place by an internal mechanism.
Remove Screws From Below Frame
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the
vehicle.
Step Three
4. Store screws in a secure location.
5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame (four
door models).
WARNING!
● Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation only.
● Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
DOOR FRAME INS
T
ALLA
TION
FOUR
DOOR
MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Install the front door rail first.
2. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal
at the top of the windshield, and line up the holes
for the Torx head screws (two for each door).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
2
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from underneath.
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they are
snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws
or overtighten. Refer to the following table for the
appropriate torque specifications for the door rail
screws.
Step Three
Target Torque
Specif
ication
For Torx F
as-
teners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lb (9
N·m)
87.6 in-lb (9.9
N·m)
71.7 in-lb (8.1
N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of
the body side, just behind the rear door opening.
Step Four
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto
the rear of the front door rail, making sure
rubber seals lie flat. Ensure the seals are installed
correctly to avoid water leaks.
Position Of Frame Above Door
1 — Front Door Rail
2 — Rear Door Frame
6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from underneath.
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they are
snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws
or overtighten. Refer to the previous table for the
appropriate torque specifications for the door rail
screws.
Insert Screws From Below Frame
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION T
WO DOOR
MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal
at the top of the windshield, and line up the holes
for the Torx head screws (two for each door).
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from underneath.
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they are
snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws
or overtighten. Refer to the following table for the
appropriate torque specifications for the door rail
screws.
Step Two
Target Torque
Specif
ication
For Torx F
as-
teners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lb (9
N·m)
87.6 in-lb (9.9
N·m)
71.7 in-lb (8.1
N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recommended in
vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top. Damage
will occur to the top as well as the header seal.
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a
structural element that can provide some protection
in some accidents. The windshield also provides some
protection against weather, road debris and intrusion of
small branches and other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down, as you lose the protection this structural element
can provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can
be folded down. However, the protection afforded by the
windshield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h),
with low range operation preferred if you are driving
off-road with the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that required
its removal is completed and before you return to on-
road driving. Both you and your passengers should
wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off-road,
regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded
down.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal injury:
● Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down.
● Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
● Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at
all times when the windshield is down.
● Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions
for raising the windshield. Make sure that the
folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars,
and all associated hardware and fasteners are
correctly and tightly assembled before driving your
vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent your vehicle from providing you and your
passengers’ protection in some accidents.
● If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door
may cause personal injury.
LOWERING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Before completing the following steps:
● If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top, the
top MUST be lowered, and the door rails must
be removed prior to lowering the windshield.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top,
the Freedom Panels MUST be removed prior to
lowering the windshield.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
2
● Refer to the following instructions for more
information:
○ Soft Top Lowering
ð
page 98
○ Door Frame
ð
page 116
○ Freedom Top Panels
ð
page 108
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage to
the vehicle’s header seal.
2. Manually remove the protective caps over the
windshield wiper hex bolts.
Step Two
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the two
hex bolts and remove the wiper arms.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both
sun visors.
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, remove
the four Torx screws located along the interior of
the windshield.
Step Five
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
tie-down bumpers (if equipped).
Step Six
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Tie-Down
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the tie-down on either side of the hood
and on the windshield frame. Tighten the strap to
secure the windshield in place. An OEM Mopar®
designed windshield tie down strap kit is available
for purchase from an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield
could result.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor
Protective Cover — If Equipped
Your vehicle requires a protective cover that is to be
used whenever the windshield is folded down in order
to protect the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Collision Warning (FCW) sensor. An OEM Mopar®
designed protective cover is available for purchase from
an authorized dealer. To install the cover, follow these
instructions:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to
the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it
covers the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning the
windshield to the normal position. Store the cover in
the cargo area.
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can
accumulate in the cover and block the camera lens.
Use a microfiber cloth to clean the camera lens,
module, and inside cover, being careful not to damage
or scratch the module.
RAISING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in
the lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, reinstall
the four Torx screws located along the interior of
the windshield. Secure them until they are snug,
being careful not to cross-thread the screws or
overtighten.
Interior Torx Screw Locations
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the
provided 15 mm socket. First, align the tips of
the blade to the “T” mark in the glass. Then,
while holding the arm in that position, reinstall the
hex nut and tighten until snug. Be careful not to
overtighten. Repeat for the other arm.
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper arm
hex bolts and push gently until they snap into
place.
Step Five
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
6. After completing the previous steps:
● If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top,
reinstall the Door Rails and raise the top.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top,
reinstall the Freedom Panels.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
WARNING!
For Hybrid models: Always place the ignition in the
OFF position before opening the hood. If the ignition
is in the RUN position and the Propulsion System is
active when the hood is opened, the engine could
automatically start, and persons not clear of the
vehicle could be injured by the engine’s moving parts.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
2
Release both of the outside hood latches.
Hood Latch Locations
Raise the hood slightly, and place a hand palm-side
down in the center of the hood opening. Locate the
safety latch in the middle, and push the latch to the
right to open.
Place Hand In Hood Opening
Remove the support rod from the hood, and insert it
into the radiator crossmember.
Hood Prop Rod Slot
NOTE:
● Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
● You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
● While lifting the hood, use both hands.
● Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
● For Hybrid models: If the vehicle was actively
charging the high voltage battery when the hood was
opened, the vehicle will stop charging until the hood
is closed.
● For Hybrid models:Electric drive mode will not be
available while the hood is open. A message will
show in the instrument cluster display to alert the
driver.
CL
OSING THE HOOD
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the slot
and replace it on the hood panel retaining clip. Lower
the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
NOTE:
For Hybrid models: If the vehicle stopped charging the
high voltage battery when the hood was opened, the
vehicle will resume charging when the hood closes.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using one of
the following methods:
● Mechanical key (with mechanical lock — if equipped)
● Remote Keyless Entry key fob (if equipped)
● Power door unlock switch on the front doors (if
equipped)
● Passive Entry swing gate handle (if equipped)
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open the swing gate, pull on the gate handle.
Swing Gate Handle
Flip-Up Window (Hard Top Models Only)
To open the flip-up window, first open the swing gate,
then lift up on the window.
Flip-Up Window
NOTE:
Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to close
the swing gate.
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by these
fumes. Keep the flip-up window closed when you are
operating the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing the
rear flip-up window, as damage to the blade will
result.
NOTE:
The swing gate hinges and check strap may require
cleaning if a squeak can be heard when opening the
swing gate. Progressive accumulation of dirt or debris
on the check strap arm may cause failure of the check
strap, requiring replacement. For further information on
vehicle cleaning procedures, see
ð
page 356.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle
is moving.
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
WARNING!
● Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
● To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area.
The rear cargo space is intended for load-carrying
purposes only, not for passengers who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
● Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door
or left door center pillar.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
2
WARNING!
● Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
● Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
● Do not place luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. Doing so could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models ONL
Y.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lb (45 kg), this
includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should be
uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to
be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load
on the luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Anything improperly secured to the roof rack,
crossbars, or the roof itself can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in collisions,
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack cautions when carrying anything on your roof or
roof rack.
CAUTION!
● To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and appropriately secure the load and
any protective layer placed between the load and
the roof surface.
● Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
should be secured to both the front and rear of
the vehicle.
● Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
● Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It
is recommended to not carry large flat loads, such
as wood panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as
supplementary tie down points only. Do not use
ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
3
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
● The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant. It is recommended
to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
● The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
ð
page 129.
4. Fuel Gauge
● The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
3
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
filler door is located.
5. Speedometer
● Indicates vehicle speed.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will
occur.
2. Temperature Gauge
● The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the instrument cluster.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — HYBRID
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS —
HYBRID
1. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will
occur.
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
● This gauge shows the engine coolant
temperature. The gauge pointer will likely
show higher temperatures when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or in heavy stop
and go traffic. If the red Warning Light turns on
while driving, safely bring the vehicle to a stop,
and turn off the engine. DO NOT operate the
vehicle until the cause is corrected.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant. It is recommended
to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
● The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display. When the appropriate
conditions exist, this display shows messages
ð
page 129.
4. Fuel Gauge
● The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
5. Power/Charge Gauge
● This gauge represents the source of the power
utilized to accelerate the vehicle. The green
outer ring represents the High Voltage (HV)
battery output during acceleration, and input
power during regeneration. The yellow inner ring
represents the engine output power.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing
of a door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer.
Your instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located on
the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display
can show you how systems are working and give
you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY LOCATION
AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
of the instrument cluster.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
3
Instrument Cluster Display Location
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
● Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
● Up Arro
w Button
Push and release the up
arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
● Right Arr
ow Button
Push and release the right
arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
● Down Arro
w Button
Push and release the down
arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
● OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item.
Push and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds
to reset displayed/selected features that can be
reset.
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon — Hybrid
Only
Stop Safely Vehicle Will
Shut Off Soon Warning Message
This warning will be displayed on the instrument panel
display when the vehicle has determined an operational
issue will occur shortly, which will cause the vehicle's
propulsion system to turn off. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
possible. Have the vehicle transported to an authorized
dealer.
● This message will be displayed continuously
● Cannot be cleared with button press
● A single chime will sound
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle As Soon As
Possible — Hybrid Only
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle
As Soon As Possible Warning Message
A warning will appear on the instrument panel display
if the system detects the high voltage battery has
overheated. This can result in a vehicle fire, and the
release of toxic and/or flammable gases. To reduce
the risk of a larger fire, the vehicle’s high voltage
propulsion system will turn off within thirty seconds of
displaying this warning. At that time, the vehicle may
not accelerate. You can still steer and brake the vehicle.
Stop and park the vehicle in an open area. Have all
passengers exit the vehicle as soon as possible and
move to a safe distance away from the vehicle. After
all passengers safely exit the vehicle, call emergency
responders immediately. Even if you do not see flames,
a fire may start at any moment, so do not attempt to
re-enter or start the vehicle.
● This message will be displayed continuously.
● Cannot be cleared with a button press.
● A continuous and rapid chime will sound.
CAUTION!
If the instrument cluster instructs you to change the
engine oil, do not reset the service indicator without
changing the oil. Engine damage may result.
CAUTION!
● An overheated High Voltage Battery may result
in electrical systems damage. Do not attempt to
restart the vehicle. The vehicle must be towed to
an authorized dealer.
O
IL
C
HANGE R
ESET
— I
F EQUIPPED
Scan this QR code to learn more
about instrument cluster features.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the instrument cluster display for five
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
To turn off the message temporarily, push and release
the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to
the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in
the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
ELECTRIC MODE TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
If Electric Drive mode is unavailable, the reason will
display for five seconds at start up. If your check engine
light comes on, see an authorized dealer immediately.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
3
Electric Mode Temporarily Unavailable Message
See the following information for the most common
reasons that the Electric mode would be unavailable:
Operator Choices that can inhibit Electric mode
● Transmission in Manual Shift mode - Shift to Drive to
use Electric mode.
● Heavily depressed accelerator pedal position,
requesting high power demand - Beyond the limits
of the electric drivetrain, will cause engine to run,
enabling the powertrain to produce its full combined
power available in Hybrid mode.
● Sustained high speed operation in Electric mode -
Using the engine is more efficient for high speeds
than Electric drive.
● Transfer case and drive mode selection - eSave
mode almost always runs the engine. Hybrid mode,
in 4WD Low, will also run the engine.
● Electric range is depleted - You need to recharge to
enjoy Electric mode, or you can continue normally in
Hybrid.
● Hood open (or a hood switch fault) - This is to
prevent unexpected engine starts with the hood
open.
Thermal Protection that can inhibit Electric mode
● Engine, transmission or engine starting belt too cold
- Some systems require warm up to function properly
if the outside temperature is below 32°F (15°F in
Electric Drive mode).
● Electric cabin heating capacity limits (or electric
cabin heater fault) - Unlike Battery Electric Vehicles
(BEV's), the Hybrid Wrangler can warm the cabin
more efficiently with engine heat when operating
below 15°F outside temperature.
● HV battery, motors or contactors over temperature
- This is a temporary hardware protection feature.
Vehicle performance will resume once protection is
no longer required. If the vehicle performance is
accompanied with the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL), have the vehicle serviced at an authorized
dealership.
Component Protection that can inhibit Electric mode
● HV battery undervoltage - Sustained EV operation at
high speed, especially with aftermarket wheels and
tires, can induce this.
● Other electric propulsion system faults indicated by a
MIL - Please bring the vehicle to your dealership for
service.
● Fuel And Oil Refresh mode - See the following
section.
Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode
Since it is possible to operate this vehicle for extended
periods of time without running the gas engine, the fuel
within the vehicle’s fuel tank can become stale or the
engine oil’s lubricating properties can be reduced. To
prevent engine and/or fuel system damage due to stale
fuel, as well as maintaining internal engine lubrication,
this vehicle is equipped with a Fuel and Oil Refresh
mode.
Oil Refresh Mode Message
The vehicle will automatically enter into the Fuel and Oil
Refresh mode to minimize potential for stale fuel, and
to ensure lubrication of internal engine components.
When operating in this mode, the gas engine will run
to provide vehicle propulsion (electric only operation
is inhibited). A message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster when Oil Refresh mode or Fuel
Refresh mode is active.
The vehicle will automatically exit the Fuel and Oil
Refresh mode when fuel and lubrication conditions
have been satisfied. If the vehicle enters Fuel or Oil
Refresh mode, due to fuel which has been in the fuel
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
tank for a long period of time (becoming stale fuel), the
engine will run whenever the vehicle is operational (no
electric only operation) until the Low Fuel Level warning
is activated. It is also possible to exit the Fuel and Oil
Refresh mode sooner by adding a minimum of four
gallons (15 Liters) of new fuel to the vehicle’s fuel tank.
NOTE:
If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh mode to
maintain engine lubrication, adding fuel will not exit the
mode sooner.
If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh mode to
maintain engine lubrication properties, the engine may
run for a period of up to 2.5 hours when fully warm
whenever the vehicle is operational (no electric only
operation). If the vehicle is shut down before conditions
to exit the refresh mode have been satisfied, the
engine may run for additional time on subsequent trips.
Oil refresh may take significantly longer in freezing
temperatures.
NOTE:
● Frequent short trips at low ambient temperature
conditions where the engine does not reach normal
operating temperatures are more likely to trigger the
lubrication based mode.
● Electric drive mode will be temporarily unavailable
while the Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode (FORM) is
active. Do not attempt to return to Electric Mode
until the FORM cycle is complete.
CAUTION!
If the instrument cluster instructs you to change the
engine oil, do not reset the service indicator without
changing the oil. Engine damage may result.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
● Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in black under normal conditions, yellow
for noncritical warnings and red for critical warnings
● Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is shown
here
● Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
● Gear Selector Status (PRND)
● Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time)
● Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages and warning or information messages. These
pop-up messages fall into several categories:
● Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type
of message takes control of the main display area
for five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. Most of the messages of this type are
then stored (as long as the condition that activated
it remains active) and can be reviewed from the
“Messages” main menu item. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
● U
nstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
● Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed until
the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this
message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start”.
● Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type
of message takes control of the main display
area for five seconds and then returns to the
previous screen. An example of this message type
is “Automatic High Beams On”.
Messages include the following, but not limited to:
NOTE:
Certain messages may require dealer service.
Front Seat Belts
Unbuckled
Oil Change Due ACC Override
Driver Seat Belt
Unbuckled
Fuel Low Cruise Set To
XXX mph or
km/h
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
3
Passenger Seat
Belt Unbuckled
Service Anti-
lock Brake Sys-
tem
Service Shifter
Traction Control
Off
Service Elec-
tronic Throttle
Control
Tire Pressure
Screen With
Low Tire(s)
Washer Fluid
Low
Service Power
Steering
Service Tire
Pressure Sys-
tem
Oil Pressure
Low
Cruise Off Park Brake En-
gaged
Oil Level Low –
If Equipped
Cruise Ready Brake Fluid Low
Engine Temper-
ature Hot
Lights On Right Front Turn
Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn
Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn
Signal Light Out
Left Rear Turn
Signal Light Out
Ignition or Ac-
cessory On
Vehicle Not In
Park
Remote Start
Active Push
Start Button
Remote Start
Canceled Fuel
Low
Remote Start
Canceled Hood
Open
Remote Start
Canceled Lift-
gate Open
Remote Start
Canceled Door
Open
Remote Start
Canceled Time
Expired
Remote Start
Disabled Start
To Reset
Service Air Bag
System
Service Air Bag
Warning Light
Door Open
Doors Open Hood Open Vehicle Speed
Too High To
Shift to D
Liftgate Open Shift Not Al-
lowed
Vehicle Speed is
Too High to Shift
to R
Vehicle Speed is
Too High to Shift
to P
Service Trans-
mission
INSTRUMENT CLUS
TER DISPLAY SELECTABLE
ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
Speedometer Driver Assist —
If Equipped
Stop/Start
Vehicle Info Fuel Economy Audio
Off Road Trip Info Messages
Screen Setup Phone Call Sta-
tus — If Equip-
ped
NOTE:
The instrument cluster menu items display in the
center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary
depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to toggle between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left
or right arrow button to scroll through the
information submenus and push and release the OK
button to select or reset the resettable submenus.
Tire Pressure Coolant Temper-
ature
Transmission
Temperature —
Automatic
Transmission
Only
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temperature Oil Pressure Oil Life
Battery Voltage Single Gauge
Submenu — If
Equipped
Critical Level
Logic — If Equip-
ped
Off Road
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
or right arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus.
● Drivetrain
○ Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and
numerical value of calculated average front wheel
angle from the steering wheel orientation.
○ Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Part
Time, 4WD Low status.
○ Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped):
displays front and rear or rear only axle locker
graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with
text message (connected or disconnected).
● Pitch And Roll
○ Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the
graphic with the angle number on the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display
the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the
numbers, and the graphic will be greyed out. A message
indicating the necessary speed for the feature to
become available will also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC
systems.
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the
steering wheel), and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
● System Cancel
● Driver Override
● System Off
● ACC Proximity Warning
● ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
ð
page 181.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK
button
to reset average fuel economy feature.
Toggle left
or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
● Range – The display shows the estimated distance
(mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel
remaining in the tank. When the Range value is less
than 10 miles (16 kilometers), the Range display will
change to a “LOW” message. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW”
message and a new Range value will display. Range
cannot be reset through the OK button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
3
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading
will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the
vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
● Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last
reset.
● Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving.
Energy Economy — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Energy Economy is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push the lef
t
or right arrow button
to scroll through the following information submenus:
● Average Energy Economy gauge + value (hold OK to
reset)
● Current Energy Economy gauge + value
● Total Range
Hybrid Info
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until Hybrid Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the lef
t
or right arrow button to scroll
through the following information submenus:
Range t
o Empty
● Electric Range
● Hybrid Range
● Total Range
Efficiency Coach
Efficiency Coach will monitor your current driving to
help you drive as efficient as possible.
● “Accel” is based on amount of acceleration
(Different from MPG).
○ The gauge will only move up when accelerator
pedal is pushed (or accelerating with Cruise
Control or ACC).
○ Above a certain rate of change will be considered
inefficient.
○ The color of the gauge bar will change from green
to yellow to orange.
● “Brake” is based on amount of deceleration (slowing
down).
○ The gauge will only move down when brake pedal
is pushed (or decelerating with Cruise Control or
ACC).
○ The color of the gauge bar will change from green
to yellow to orange.
● The gauge bar color will transition smoothly up
and down, and have a gradual change based on
efficiency.
○ Center of gauge is 0% Accel and 0% Brake.
○ +/-0-35% of gauge fills green, +/-36-80% yellow,
and +/-81-100% orange (with a blend between
each color).
Efficiency Coach Gauge
Charge/Power
● Charging is represented by the gauge filling on the
left hand side.
● Power is represented by the gauge filling on the right
hand side.
Charge/Power Gauge
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
E-Drive Mode
● Hybrid automatically adapts for most efficient
driving.
● Electric mode saves fuel for later use.
● e-Save mode saves battery for later use.
Trip Info
Gasoline
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display, then push and release the lef
t
or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
● Distance
● Average Fuel Economy
● Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Hybrid Only
Push and release the up
or do
wn
arrow button
until Trip Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left
or right arrow button to
scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Trip
information will display the following:
Trip A
● Distance Electric
● Distance Hybrid
● Distance Total
● Average Energy Economy
● Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Trip B
● Distance Electric
● Distance Hybrid
● Distance Total
● Average Energy Economy
● Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. The screen will display the
Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This menu will display the
audio source information, including the Song name,
Artist name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
Messages
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the right
arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, a “No Stored
Messages” will display.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed
in the instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
NOTE:
Based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status, some of the features may not be available.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left and Right
None Current MPG (or
L/100km,
km/L)
Average MPG
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Outside Temp Compass Trip A Distance
Range To Empty Time Trip B Distance
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
3
Center
None Compass Time
Outside Temp Average MPG
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Trip A Distance
Range to Empty Audio Speedometer
Current MPG (or
L/100km,
km/L)
Trip B Distance Menu Title
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Stop/Start Vehicle Info
Off Road – If
Equipped
(show/hide)
Messages Driver Assist – If
Equipped
(show/hide)
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Screen Setup Trip Info (Show/
Hide)
Audio (show/
hide)
Gear Display — If Equipped
● Full
● Single
Current Gear — If Equipped
● On
● Off
Odometer — If Equipped
● Show
● Hide
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
● Cancel
● Restore
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press
OK button to choose show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Phone Call Status — If Equipped
A pop-up message for an incoming call will appear on
any screen within your instrument cluster. The pop-up
message will appear on your screen until it is cleared
out of the call is ignored, answered, or the calling ends.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Settings can be programmed to turn the
pop-up off. This will not affect the audio menu or any
phone status information
ð
page 211.
Any incoming calls, active calls, and outgoing calls will
take the place of your audio information.
A caller’s name will only be displayed if:
● A number is associated with the call. The phone
number will be displayed in place of the caller’s
name.
● The test/font of the name is not supported by the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster will not
display anything in place of the name.
● The caller’s name exceeds the maximum number of
characters. The last two to three digits that will fit
will be replaced with “...”.
NOTE:
Any audio information will return to the instrument
cluster once the call has ended.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER MODE
MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating,
electrical load reduction actions will take place to
extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle.
This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-
essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk of
battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may
stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart
after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
● The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a
diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
● If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
ð
page 140.
The following are electrical loads that may be switched
off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
● Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
● Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
● HVAC System
● 150W Power Inverter System
● Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
● The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because the
electrical loads are larger than the capability of
the charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
● Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 150W, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
● Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and
similar devices.
● Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
● The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
● The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
● The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
● The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights,
chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
● Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 150W, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
● Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
● Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
● The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will
display first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault with the air bag, and will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
3
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the
light is not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or
that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
until the condition has been corrected. If the problem
is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
ð
page 175.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a problem with the ETC system. If a problem
is detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending
on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough
idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require
towing. The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service
ð
page 292.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Service
Warning Light — Hybrid Only
This warning light will illuminate when
service to the hybrid electric system is
needed. It will be accompanied by a
"Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle System"
message in the cluster. If the telltale stays on or
continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate, and a
chime will sound, to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light and chime turn
on while driving, safely stop the vehicle
and turn off the engine as soon as possible. After
the vehicle is safely stopped, restart the engine and
monitor the Oil Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil
Pressure Warning Light is still illuminated, turn the
engine OFF and contact an authorized dealer for further
assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause
is corrected. If the light is no longer illuminated, the
engine can be operated but it is recommended to take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Plug Status Fault Warning Light — Hybrid
Only
This warning light will illuminate when a
plug status fault is detected (when vehicle
not in motion). It will be accompanied by a
cluster message indicating the type of fault.
You may receive one of the following messages if a fault
is detected:
● “Service Charging System” – If you see this
message, it is recommended to unplug and plug in
again, or try a different charging station. If an issue
continues, contact an authorized dealer to service
your high voltage charging system.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
3
● “Issue Detected Check External Charging Station”
– If you see this message, the charging station
might be powered off, have an internal fault or be
scheduled to charge later. It is recommended to try a
different charging station. If an issue continues, then
contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Older or non-compliant J1772 EVSE models may
not support charging of this vehicle. If this vehicle
does not charge, it may be connected to a non-
compliant Level 2 EVSE, and will flash indicators.
Please identify this failure to the site operator and/or
EVSE provider.
● Before this vehicle can be driven, the EVSE Charging
Cord must be disconnected from the vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and
a chime will sound
ð
page 252.
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
swing gate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Torque Limited Warning Light — Hybrid
Only
This warning light illuminates when vehicle
acceleration is limited due to a reduction
in engine or electric motor performance.
Contact an authorized dealer for service if
illumination persists.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of
a high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster,
with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire. If you
continue to operate the vehicle when the “CLUTCH
HOT” message is displayed, or the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light is illuminated, you could
cause the clutch to overheat and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure. If you continue to operate the vehicle when
the “CLUTCH HOT” message is displayed, or the
Transmission Temperate Warning Light is illuminated,
you could cause the clutch to overheat and cause
severe clutch damage, transmission damage, or
failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the Vehicle
Security system is arming, and then will
flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Drowsy Driver Detected System is not
operating correctly and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
● The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
● This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have
them inspect it.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the
filler cap to disengage the light. If the light
does not turn off, please see an authorized
dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a
chime will sound. The light will remain on
until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
ð
page
302.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors
engine and automatic transmission control
systems. This warning light will illuminate
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before
engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning
the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss
of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as previously
referenced, can reach higher temperatures than in
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
3
WARNING!
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
you drive slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend you drive
to the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service
ð
page 181.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the Forward Collision Warning
System. Contact an authorized dealer for
service
ð
page 246.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Cruise Control system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a
fault in the sway bar disconnect system
ð
page 167.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
(Continued)
CAUTION!
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants
may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to indicate a TSR
fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the
light remains on after restarting the engine.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode,
and the front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels
ð
page 161.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the Four-Wheel Drive part time mode,
and the front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front and/or
rear axle locker fault has been detected.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off
ð
page 246.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front, rear, or
both axles have been locked. The telltale
will display the lock icon on the front
and rear axles to indicate the current lock
status.
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the Neutral mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
3
Off Road+ Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when Off
Road+ has been activated.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock
has been activated
ð
page 161.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front sway bar is disconnected
ð
page
167.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and there is no vehicle
in front detected
ð
page 181.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
vehicle in front is detected
ð
page 181.
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the Four-Wheel Drive auto mode. The
system will provide power to all four wheels
and shift the power between the front and
rear axles as needed. This will provide maximum
traction in dry and slippery conditions.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set to the desired speed
ð
page 180.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
ð
page 75.
Max Regeneration Indicator Light —
Hybrid Only
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that Max Regeneration is on and capable.
When the switch is pressed, the following
instrument cluster messages will be seen:
● “Max Regeneration On” – appears when the feature
is turned on.
● “Max Regeneration Off” – appears when the feature
is turned off.
● “Max Regeneration Unavailable” – appears when the
feature is requested, but the vehicle is unable to
comply. LED will flash for five seconds to indicate
unavailability
ð
page 21.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Plug Status Indicator Light — Hybrid Only
When plugged in, the green plug indicator
light will illuminate if the Electric Vehicle
Supply Equipment (EVSE) charging plug is
securely attached to the charging port. This
indicates that the plug is detected, but doesn't mean
it is charging. It will be accompanied with a cluster
message indicating the charge status:
● “Plugged In And Charging”
● “Plugged In And Waiting to Charge On A Set
Schedule”
● “Plugged in and Charging Complete”
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven until it is unplugged.
Ready To Drive Indicator Light — Hybrid
Only
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the vehicle has enough power to be
driven, regardless of the speed of the
vehicle.
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn
signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
● A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
● Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on, but
not set.
2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
With a Premium Instrument Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the Two-Wheel Drive High mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature
is turned on. The light will be on solid when
HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed
when the transfer case is in the 4WD Low
position and the vehicle speed is less than 30 mph (48
km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting
to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash
on/off.
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light — If
Equipped
Driver drowsiness detection helps to avoid
crashes caused by fatigue by advising
drivers to take a break in time. Once Drowsy
Driver is detected, A pop-up will display
continuously until the driver presses the OK button to
clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until
the condition is no longer true.
Max Regeneration Indicator Light —
Hybrid Only
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that Max Regeneration is on and not ready.
When the switch is pressed, the following
instrument cluster messages will be seen:
● “Max Regeneration On” – appears when the feature
is turned on.
● “Max Regeneration Off” – appears when the feature
is turned off.
● “Max Regeneration Unavailable” – appears when the
feature is requested, but the vehicle is unable to
comply. LED will flash for five seconds to indicate
unavailability
ð
page 21.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec-Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”, ensure the vehicle
is in 4WD Low and push the button on the Instrument
Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed
Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
3
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not set.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on.
With the low beams activated, push the
multifunction lever forward (toward the front
of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the
vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams
are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not set.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
● Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system.
It could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any
emissions tests can be performed.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (
OBD II)
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related
to the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access this
information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system
ð
page 211.
WARNING!
● ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port
in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
● If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle
registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a
battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check
if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
● The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
● The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle
was recently serviced or had a battery failure or
replacement, you may need to do nothing more than
drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for
your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the
previously mentioned test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can
fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
3
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE VEHICLE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
● When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting
the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch
interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the
clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.
Four
-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will
start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor. This feature enhances off-road
performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in
4L without having to press the clutch pedal. The 4L
Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case
has been shifted into this mode.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK
position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply
the brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle
stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pushed once, the transmission will automatically
select PARK and the engine will turn off while the
ignition will remain in the ACC position (NOT the
OFF position). Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the
START/STOP button once will turn the engine off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC position.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn
the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC
position (NOT the OFF position) if the engine is
turned off when the transmission is not in PARK.
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the ignition
will cycle to the OFF position after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine
not running) position and the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and
RUN. To change the ignition positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC position (instrument
cluster will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to place the ignition to the RUN position
(instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on
the following pages occur. It is a back-up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
● Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. If the "P"
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK.
As an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
● AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may Aut
oPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
● Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is removed
and the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor
detects driver missing)
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Ignition is switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC
position.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the v
ehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
A
utoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
● Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is removed
and the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor
detects driver missing)
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
● Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift
To Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2
mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
4
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
4L
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4L.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue
until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door
is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is
in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and
release it when the engine starts. For vehicles
equipped with the ENGINE START/STOP button,
press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat
the “Extended Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes,
then repeat the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after following the
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an extended park condition, as previously
defined, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the
engine for no more than 10 to 15 seconds. This should
clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition in the RUN position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
● Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
● Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle.
● If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly
ð
page 289.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 to 15 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXTREME COLD WEATHER (BELO
W –22°F
OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically and will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
● Before exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
● Always make sure the ignition is in the OFF
position, key fob is removed from the vehicle and
vehicle is locked.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
WARNING!
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Activate the Propulsion System Active (PSA) or Ready
to Drive mode with the gear selector in the PARK (P)
position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving
range.
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in
ð
page 16.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted
battery. In this situation, a back-up method can be used
to operate the ignition switch. Put the key fob against
the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate
the ignition switch.
NORMAL STARTING
Achieving vehicle READY using the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The READY indicator will appear in the instrument
cluster display when the vehicle is in Ready to
Drive mode, which may include the start of the
engine depending on conditions such as battery
state of charge and engine temperature.
4. If you wish to terminate Ready to Drive mode, push
the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch by providing three positions: OFF, ACC
and ON/RUN. To change the ignition position without
starting the vehicle (to power certain accessories),
follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once,
without the brake pedal being pressed, to place
the ignition in the ACC position (instrument cluster
will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time, without the brake pedal being pressed,
to place the ignition in the ON/RUN position
(instrument cluster will display “Ignition or
Accessory On”).
NOTE:
The vehicle is not able to be driven in the Ignition
or Accessory On position, see “Achieving vehicle
READY using the ENGINE START/STOP button”
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
4
previously defined in this section for further
information.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time,
without the brake pedal being pressed, to return
the ignition to the OFF position (instrument cluster
will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
ð
page 129.
AFTER STARTING
To optimize energy efficiency, the vehicle will
automatically control engine operation.
TO TURN OFF THE VEHICLE USING
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition button indicator will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with
vehicle speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h), when
the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed, the
instrument cluster display will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message, and the vehicle will remain
running.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with
vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
when the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
continuously for at least two seconds (or three
short pushes in a row), the vehicle ignition will exit
the Ready mode and enter Accessory mode. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE:
● This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left in a READY state (vehicle
running) with the gear selector in PARK for 30
minutes, the vehicle will automatically turn itself off.
● The vehicle provides automatic notification using
a three horn chirp alert, cluster chiming, and a
cluster message (“Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle”)
if the vehicle was not turned off (still “Ready to
Drive”) and a valid key fob for the vehicle is not
detected within the passenger cabin, following the
opening and closing of any passenger compartment
door (requires all doors to be closed before the key
fob check will occur). These automatic alerts are
to remind the driver to turn off the vehicle before
leaving it, as well as, to let the driver know that
the vehicle's key fob may have been unintentionally
removed from the vehicle by an exiting passenger.
After providing the horn chirp alert, additional auto
chirps will be inhibited until the gear selector has
been moved out of PARK or ignition cycled.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-
in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
ð
page 366.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or manual
transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly
as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
up slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
● When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake Warning
Light will flash if vehicle speed is detected. A chime
will sound if the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8
km/h) to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
● This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the
parking brake before placing the gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Never use the PARK position on an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
● When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
● Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
● Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or FIRST gear. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
● Never drive with your foot resting on or partially
depressing the clutch pedal. Never attempt to
hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. Operating vehicle in this
manner may cause the clutch to overheat and
cause permanent damage to the clutch. If you
continue to operate the vehicle in this manner,
the “CLUTCH HOT” message or Transmission
Temperature Warning Light will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. For more information
ð
page
139.
● Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear
selector as the force exerted, even if slight, over
time could lead to premature wear of the gearbox
internal components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
4
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up.
This is normal.
Transmission Gear Selector
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place
the gear selector into the desired gear position (the
diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed
on the handle of the selector). The engaged gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position,
lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move
the gear selector all the way left and then forward.
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears.
As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the
accelerator pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting from a
standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when
the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and
is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted
as listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at
the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Speeds Accel. Cruise
3.6L Engine
1 to 2 15 (24) 10 (16)
2 to 3 24 (39) 19 (31)
3 to 4 50 (80) 40 (64)
4 to 5 65 (104) 55 (88)
5 to 6 70 (112) 65 (105)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H
and 4H only. Vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly
less.
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
NOTE:
The manual transmission shift system is equipped with
gear blockers, which will prevent downshifts into FIRST
or SECOND gear above certain vehicle speeds.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
● Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears
at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine
and clutch systems. Any attempt to shift into lower
gear with the clutch pedal pressed may result in
damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower
gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.
(Continued)
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
● When descending a hill, be very careful to
downshift one gear at a time to prevent
overspeeding the engine which can cause engine
damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in low range
the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch
damage are significantly lower.
● Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine
damage and/or damage the clutch, even if the
clutch pedal is pressed.
● Descending a hill in low range with the clutch
pedal pressed could result in clutch damage.
Maximum Recommended Downshift
Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine to
overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the
clutch pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH
(KM/H)
Gear Selection Maximum Speed
6 to 5 80 (129)
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH
(KM/H)
Gear Selection Maximum Speed
5 to 4 70 (113)
4 to 3 50 (81)
3 to 2 30 (48)
2 to 1 15 (24)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the preceding chart are for 2H
and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly
less.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator
solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
4
WARNING!
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This
helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the engine
will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK,
and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC position) before
exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
(BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8–SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must
be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped
or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned
to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
environmental and road conditions. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This
is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using
the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position) will
manually select the transmission gear, and will display
the current gear in the instrument cluster
ð
page
160.
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward),
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle
is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on
a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
● Apply the parking brake.
● Shift the transmission into PARK.
● Turn the ignition OFF.
● Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the transfer
case is in a drive position.
CAUTION!
● Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
● DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
● When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all
the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
● Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
● With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if
you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
● Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
4
CAUTION!
● For Recreational Towing
ð
page 203.
● For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
ð
page 294.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all forward
gears. The DRIVE position should be used for all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the
AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
ð
page
160. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C]
or below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of transmission
shifting also known as AutoStick mode. Toggling the
gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in
the instrument cluster
ð
page 160.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may
not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations,
the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more
serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be
necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
NOTE:
● In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in
a desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
● Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission.
● If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
Steering Wheel Mounted
Paddle Shifters (If Equipped)
1 — (-) Paddle Shifter
2 — (+) Paddle Shifter
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into
the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position)
or tap one of the paddle shifters (if equipped) on the
steering wheel. The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode,
you can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL position)
or the paddle shifters (if equipped) to manually shift the
transmission.
AutoStick mode has the following operational benefits:
● The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
● The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
● You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range). Tapping (+) (at a
stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out
in SECOND or THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
● If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
● The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
● Holding the gear selector or paddle shifter (if
equipped) in the (-) position will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
● Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
● The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control (if
equipped) is enabled AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift
paddle (if equipped) (and the gear selector is already
in DRIVE) until “D” is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power
and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do
not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
FOUR-POSITION TRANSFER CASE — IF
EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides four positions:
● 2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range
● 4H — Four-Wheel Drive High Range
● N (Neutral)
● 4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
4
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each transfer case position, see the following:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction for loose, slippery road
surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
(N) Neutral position without first fully engaging the
(Continued)
WARNING!
parking brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle
ð
page 203.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions, such
as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to
lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The
4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving.
Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced
roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to
the driveline components. For further information on
shifting into 4H or 4L
ð
page 162.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts
are locked together. The light will illuminate when the
transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed
will be approximately three times (four times for
Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at
a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H OR 4H TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred
shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h).
With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release
the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do
not accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply
a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
● Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear
driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
● Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven
tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold
temperatures.
● Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
4H TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h),
shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
While the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to
5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the
desired position. Do not pause with the transfer case
in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place the
automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch
pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due
to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment
and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is
with the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the
vehicle moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power
and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do
not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
FIVE-POSITION TRANSFER CASE
The transfer case provides five mode positions:
● 2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range
● 4H AUTO — Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range
● 4H PART TIME — Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High
Range
● N (Neutral)
● 4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each transfer case mode position, see the following:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses
a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road
conditions.
4H PART TIME
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This
range provides additional traction for loose, slippery
road surfaces only.
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
4
N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
(N) Neutral position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle
ð
page 203.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-
wheel drive position (2H) or four-wheel drive position
(4H AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on
dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the 4H AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is
engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy
than the 2H mode.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to
lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The
4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving.
Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced
roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to
the driveline components. For further information on
shifting into 4H or 4L
ð
page 164.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts
are locked together. The light will illuminate when the
transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed
will be approximately three times (four times for
Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at
a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H AUTO OR 4H A
UTO TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H AUTO can be made
with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred
shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h).
With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release
the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do
not accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply
a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H/4H AUTO TO 4H PART TIME OR 4H PART
TIME TO 2H/4H AUTO
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME can
be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The
preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72
km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case
will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release
the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do
not accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply
a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
● Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear
driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
● Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven
tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold
temperatures.
● Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
4H PART TIME/4H AUTO TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
PART TIME/4H AUTO
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h),
shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
While the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to
5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the
desired position. Do not pause with the transfer case
in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place the
automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch
pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due
to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment
and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is
with the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the
vehicle moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power
and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do
not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
TRAC-LOK REAR
AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving
force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin
caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel.
If traction differs between the two rear wheels, the
differential automatically proportions the usable torque
by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface,
a slight application of the accelerator will supply
maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) FRONT AND R
EAR —
IF EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
● Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L.
● Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
● Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same
speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will
illuminate), push the switch up to lock the front axle
and rear axle (the “FRONT + REAR” will illuminate).
When the rear axle is locked, pushing the bottom of
switch again will lock or unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully
locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of
4L, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
4
The Axle Lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
● Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Four-Wheel
Drive Low Range).
● Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
● Both right and left wheels on the axle are at the
same speed.
To activate the rear system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will
illuminate).
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle is fully
locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Four-Wheel Drive Low Range).
The axle lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY FOR
HIGH SPEED OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
The rear axle may be locked in 4H for high speed
vehicle operation if the proper conditions are met and
if equipped with either Front and Rear or Rear Only axle
lock.
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways.
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
● Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4H (Four-Wheel
Drive High Range).
● The vehicle must first be in Off Road+ active Off
Road+ — If Equipped.
● Vehicle must then be placed in ESC “Full Off” mode
ESC Operating Modes (please fully read all ESC Full
Operation details).
● Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel slip or
tight cornering condition.
To activate the rear system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will
illuminate).
To unlock the axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of
4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range), Off Road+ is turned
off by the driver, ESC “Full Off” is exited, or the ignition
switch is turned to the OFF position.
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle is fully
locked or unlocked.
The rear axle lock system may temporarily disengage
the rear locker under some conditions.
If this occurs, the rear axle will automatically re-lock as
soon as the system allows.
If an axle lock request cannot be completed by the
system within 5 seconds due to vehicle operating
conditions not being correct, the request will be
canceled and the driver may need to re-request the
locker to be activated.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows
greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
located on the instrument panel (to the right of the
steering column).
SWAY BAR Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system.
Push the switch again to deactivate the system. The
Sway Bar Indicator Light (located in the instrument
cluster) will illuminate when the bar is disconnected.
The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation
transition, or when activation conditions are not met.
The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in on-road mode
during normal driving conditions.
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before
driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds
above 18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/
sway bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury. Under
certain circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists with vehicle
control. The system monitors vehicle speed and
will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at
speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated
(Continued)
WARNING!
by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h),
the system will once again attempt to return to off-
road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H
or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the
off-road position
ð
page 161. The Sway Bar Indicator
Light will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been
fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or
vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the
bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that
the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from
side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
again.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, the Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash in
the instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be
reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph (29
km/h) with a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may
contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
4
OFF ROAD+ — IF EQUIPPED
When activated, Off Road+ is designed to improve the
user experience when using specific Off Road driving
modes. To activate Off Road+, push the OFF ROAD+
switch in the switch bank. The vehicle’s performance
will improve depending on which Four-Wheel Drive
(4WD) mode is activated.
OFF ROAD+ Switch
NOTE:
Off Road+ will not function in 2H mode. If the button is
pushed while in 2H mode, the cluster display will show
the message “Off Road+ Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.
When Off Road+ is active, the following features will
activate:
● The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster display
● A mode-specific message will display the instrument
cluster display
● Off-Road Pages will launch on the radio head-unit if
selected in radio settings
● The TrailCam System (forward facing camera) will
launch if selected in radio settings
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to behave
in different ways depending on the 4WD mode in use.
The following enhancements will occur when using Off
Road+.
4L
● Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl and
controllability focus, change in shifting schedule
when rock crawling, pedal calibration shifted to de-
gain and low range, operates at lower vehicle speeds
● Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differential
tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
● Off Road+: Recall the last status between ignition
cycles
4H
● Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved sand
performance/wheel slip focus, change in shift
schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration set to
aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle speeds
● Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning brake
lock differential with no engine management
● Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with unlimited
speed
● Off Road+: Will default to OFF between ignition
cycles
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will
not function while using Off Road+. A dedicated cluster
message will display indicating this if either feature is
activated while in Off Road+.
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off Road+, the
following will occur on the vehicle:
● Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control will
turn off, but Stability Control will remain active.
● Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Traction
Control and Stability Control will turn off.
DUAL MODE EXHAUST
This vehicle is equipped with a dual-mode exhaust,
designed to provide both quiet cruising and sporty
sound. The system has two modes, Performance
Exhaust ON and Performance Exhaust OFF. A button
on the dashboard can be used to toggle between
settings, and the light illuminates when “Performance
Exhaust ON” mode is active. In this mode, the exhaust
valves are commanded to deliver a deep, sporty sound.
A message appears momentarily in the instrument
cluster whenever the exhaust mode changes. When
the “Performance Exhaust OFF” setting is active, the
exhaust valves are closed except at high engine speeds
and loads, when they are commanded open without
notification.
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Dual Mode Exhaust Button
The Performance Exhaust is OFF by default; however, if
Performance Exhaust ON is activated by pressing the
exhaust button, this setting will be saved after changing
drive modes and after restarting the engine.
WINCH USAGE — RUBICON (IF
EQUIPPED)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE USING YOUR
WINCH
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle
recovery winch. This winch uses the electrical power
from the vehicle charging system to power a motor
that winds the winch rope onto the winch drum via
planetary gear reduction. By nature, a winch is capable
of generating very high forces and should be used with
care. Do not operate the winch without reading and
understanding the complete winch owner's manual.
Tensioning The Winch Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions listed to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the rope leaving five wraps of rope on the
winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load
required to tension the winch rope.
3. Apply at least 1,000 lb (454 kg) of tension to the
rope while winding the rope. Always use care to
ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of
the drum and is neatly wound onto the drum.
CAUTION!
The winch rope must spool on the winch drum
in the direction indicated on the drum rotation
decal on the winch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES O
F YOUR
WINCH
Winch Components
1. Remote Contr
ol: The remote control provides the
interface between the winch operator and the
winch. The remote control provides the ability to
power the winch in, out, and stop the winch. To
operate the winch, the toggle switch is pushed
down to power the winch in and up to power the
winch out. The winch will stop if the switch is left in
the neutral (center) position.
2. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle
charging system.
3. Remote Socket: The remote socket (underneath
this cap) allows the remote control to be attached
to the control pack to allow the winch to function.
4. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch
drum to be disconnected from the winch motor to
allow the rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
4
5. Synthetic Rope/Hook: The synthetic rope with
hook allows the winch to be connected to an
anchor to provide a pulling force. This synthetic
rope is highly flexible, lightweight, and it floats.
6. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum
allows the rope to be stored on the winch and
transmits force to the rope. The winch is equipped
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the
winch drum if the winch motor is stopped.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
Fairlead: The hawse fairlead acts as a guide for the
synthetic rope and minimizes damage to the rope.
WINCH ACCESSORIES
The following accessories are necessary to attach the
winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe
winching.
Gloves: It is extremely important to wear
protective gloves while operating the winch
or handling the winch rope. Avoid loose
fitting clothes or anything that could
become entangled in the rope and other moving parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly, the
multi-purpose snatch block allows you to
(1) increase the winch's pulling power; and
(2) change your pulling direction without
damaging the winch rope. Proper use of the snatch
block is covered in “Before You Pull.”
Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a safe
means of connecting the looped ends
of cables, straps and snatch blocks. The
shackle's pin is threaded to allow easy
removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of
tough, high-quality nylon, it provides the
operator an attachment point for the winch
rope to a wide variety of anchor points and
objects, as well as protects living trees.
Abrasion Sleeve: The abrasion sleeve is provided with
the synthetic rope and must be used with the synthetic
rope at all times to protect the rope from potential
abrasion wear. The sleeve has a loose fit so it can easily
be positioned along the synthetic rope to protect from
rough surfaces and sharp corners.
OPERATING YOUR WINCH
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
● Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
when spooling wire rope in or out.
● Never use as a hoist.
● Never use to move persons.
● Never exceed winch or synthetic rope rated
capacity.
● Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling
the synthetic rope.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Never touch synthetic rope or hook while in
tension or under load.
● Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is
under load, synthetic rope is in tension, or rope
drum is moving.
● Always stand clear of synthetic rope and load and
keep others away during winching.
● Always keep hands and clothing clear of the
synthetic rope, hook and fairlead opening during
operation and when spooling.
● Never wrap synthetic rope back onto itself. Always
use a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk
protector on the anchor.
● Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
● Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.
● Never use bungee or kinetic straps that develop
tremendous and potentially dangerous amounts of
force when stretched.
● Always disconnect the remote control when not in
use.
● Never winch when there are less than 10 wraps of
synthetic rope around the winch drum.
● Always pass remote control through a window to
avoid pinching lead in door, when using remote
inside a vehicle.
● Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some
key points to remember when using your winch are:
● Always take your time to assess the situation and
plan your pull carefully.
● Always take your time when using a winch.
● Use the right equipment for the situation.
● Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the
synthetic rope to slip through your hands when
handling the rope.
● Only the operator should handle the synthetic rope
and remote control.
● Think safety at all times.
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
CAUTION!
● Always know your winch: Take the time to fully
read and understand the included Installation and
Operations Guide and Basic Guide to Winching
Techniques, in order to understand your winch and
the winching operation.
● Always inspect winch installation and synthetic
rope condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged rope must be replaced
immediately. Loose or damaged winch installation
must be corrected immediately.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Always be sure any element which can interfere
with safe winching operations is removed prior to
initiating winching.
● Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
synthetic rope and rigging.
● Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed rope, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
● Be careful not to pull the winch rope collar through
the rollers. Watch and listen to winch for proper
snugness.
● Never power hook through fairlead. Could cause
damage.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and synthetic
rope for damage. Do not use the winch if the
mount is loose or rope shows excessive wear,
frays, or damage.
Winch Rope
2. Put on gloves.
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the
winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to
disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.
Free Spool Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
4
4. Free the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach
the hook strap to the hook (if not attached).
Hook Strap
WARNING!
● Never touch winch rope or hook while
someone else is at the control switch or
during winching operation.
● Never touch winch rope or hook while under
tension or under load.
5. Pull the synthetic rope to the anchor point. Pull out
enough synthetic rope to reach your anchor point.
To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap
while you work.
Pulling Synthetic Rope
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have
established your anchor point, secure the tree-
trunk protector or choker-chain around the object.
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will
withstand the load.
NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor
is critical to winching operations. An anchor must
be strong enough to hold while winching. Natural
anchors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the
cable as low as possible. If no natural anchors are
available when recovering another vehicle, your
vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this case,
be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply
the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent
your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an
anchor point that will enable you to pull straight
in the direction the vehicle will move. This allows
the synthetic rope to wind tightly and evenly onto
the spooling drum. An anchor point as far away as
possible will provide the winch with its greatest
pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-Shackle and Tree Trunk
Protector. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the
strap or chain and through the hook, being careful
not to over tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
Tree Trunk Protector
1 — Clevis/D-Shackles
2 — Tree Trunk Protector
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating
the clutch lever on the winch to engage.
NOTE:
Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control
box, located on the front of the winch. Be careful
not to let the remote control cord dangle in front
of the winch. If you choose to control the winch
from inside your vehicle, always pass the remote
through a window to avoid pinching the cord in the
door. Always disconnect the remote control when
not in use.
Winch Box Remote Control Connector
10. Put synthetic rope under tension. Using the remote
control switch, slowly wind the rope until no slack
remains. Once the rope is under tension, stand
well clear of it and never step over it.
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with
the winching procedure.
12. Check synthetic rope. The rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper
winding can cause damage to the synthetic rope.
Heavy Blanket Over Rope
In certain situations you may decide to throw a
heavy blanket or similar object over the rope.
A heavy blanket can absorb energy should the
synthetic rope break. Place it on the rope midway
between the winch and the anchor point. Do this
before the rope is put under tension. Do not
approach or move the blanket once tension is
applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the
fairlead. If it is necessary to move or remove the
blanket, slack the tension on the rope first.
13. Establish "no people" zones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate
vicinity surrounding the winching operation is
completely aware of your intentions before you
pull. Declare where the spectators should not
stand — never behind or in front of the vehicle and
never near the synthetic rope or snatch block. Your
situation may have other "no people" zones.
No People Zones
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
4
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine
on and light tension already on the synthetic rope,
begin winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that
the rope is winding evenly and tightly around
the spooling drum. For additional assistance, the
winched vehicle can be slowly driven while being
pulled by the winch. Continue pulling until the
vehicle is on stable ground. If you are able to drive
the vehicle, the winching operation is complete.
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
● Avoid overheating the winch motor. For
extended winching, stop at reasonable intervals
to allow the winch motor to cool down.
● What to look for under load: The synthetic rope
must always spool onto the drum as indicated
by the drum rotation decal on the winch. As
you power-in, make sure the synthetic rope
winds evenly and tightly on the drum. This
prevents the outer rope wraps from drawing
into the inner wraps, binding and damaging
the synthetic rope. Avoid shock loads by using
the control switch intermittently to take up rope
slack. Shock loads can momentarily far exceed
the winch and synthetic rope ratings. During
side pulls the synthetic rope tends to stack up
at one end of the drum. This stack can become
large enough to cause serious damage to the
winch. So, line up pulls as straight ahead as
possible and stop winching if the synthetic rope
comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate.
To fix an uneven stack, spool out that section of
the rope and reposition it to the opposite end of
the drum, which will free up space for continued
winching.
15. Secure the vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is
complete, be sure to secure the vehicle's brakes
and shift the transmission to PARK. Release
tension in the synthetic rope.
16. Disconnect the synthetic rope, and disconnect
from the anchor.
17. Rewind the synthetic rope. The person handling
the synthetic rope should walk the rope in and not
let it slide through the hand, control the winch at
all times.
Rewinding The Synthetic Rope
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
NOTE:
How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote
control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.
Arrange the synthetic rope so it will not kink or
tangle when spooled. Be sure any synthetic rope
already on the spooling drum is wound tightly
and evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the
layer if necessary. Keep the synthetic rope under
light tension and spool the rope back and onto
the winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently
to tighten and straighten the layers as necessary.
Repeat this process until the winch hook is the
same distance as the full length of the remote
control from the winch. Pinch the hook between
your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook
strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb
and forefinger to keep tension on the synthetic
rope. Walk the synthetic rope towards the fairlead,
carefully spooling in the remaining rope by pulsing
the remote control switch.
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the
hawse fairlead.
Hook In Stored Position
19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the
remote control cord from the control box and store
in a clean and dry place. Winching operations are
now complete. Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE:
Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
RIGGING TECHNIQUES
Various winching situations will require application of
other winching techniques. These could range from
too little distance to achieve maximum pull using
straight line rigging, simply increasing pulling power,
or maintaining a straight-line pulling situation. You will
have to assess what technique is correct for your
situation. Think “safety” at all times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
Change Pulling Directions
All winching operations should have a straight line from
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes
the synthetic rope collecting on one side of the drum
affecting pulling efficiency and damaging synthetic
rope. A snatch block, secured to a point directly in front
of the vehicle will enable you to change your pulling
direction while still allowing the synthetic rope to be at
90° to wind properly onto the spooling drum.
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases
mechanical advantage and that increases your pulling
power.
Double Line
Because pulling power decreases with the number of
layers of synthetic rope on the winch drum, you can
use a snatch block to double line out more rope. This
decreases the number of layers of synthetic rope on the
drum, and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out
enough synthetic rope to free the winch hook. Attach
the hook to your vehicle's frame/tow hook and run the
rope through a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and,
using the snatch block, pull out enough synthetic rope
to reach your anchor point. Do not attach the hook to
the mounting kit. Secure to the anchor point with a
tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach the clevis/
shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the
strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten (tighten
and back-off 1/2 turn).
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electro-Hydraulic
Power Steering system that provides increased vehicle
response and ease of maneuverability. The system
adapts to different driving conditions. If the Electro-
Hydraulic Power Steering system experiences a fault
that prevents it from providing power steering assist,
then the system will provide mechanical steering
capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the
electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power
steering assistance in order to prevent damage to
the system. Normal operation will resume once the
system is allowed to cool.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and a
flashing icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken
to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
4
vehicle has lost power steering assistance
ð
page
129.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an
icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen,
it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may
have occurred, which caused an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. You will lose
power steering assistance momentarily until the over
temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving
conditions are safe, pull over and let vehicle idle for a
few moments until the light turns off
ð
page 129.
NOTE:
● Even if power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at very low
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
● If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is designed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal
or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically
restart the engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts. Vehicles
equipped with eTorque contain a heavy-duty motor
generator and an additional hybrid electric battery
to store energy from vehicle deceleration for use on
engine startup after a stop as well as providing launch
torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start system be disabled
during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a secondary battery used
to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt vehicle
electrical system. The secondary battery is located
behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
START/STOP MODE
WARNING!
● Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
● Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver
ignition start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/
START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go
into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
● The system must be in STOP/START READY state.
A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
ð
page 129.
● The vehicle must be completely stopped.
● The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal pressed.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT
AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start screen. Situations when the engine
will not stop include (but not limited to):
● Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
● Driver’s door is not closed.
● Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
● Battery charge is low.
● The vehicle is on a steep grade.
● Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
● Gear selector is in MANUAL (M) mode.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
● HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
● Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
● Engine or exhaust temperature is too high.
● The transmission is not in a forward gear.
● Hood is open.
● Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
● Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
● Accelerator pedal input.
● Vehicle speed threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop.
● Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models
Only).
● ACC is on and speed is set.
● Vehicle is at high altitude.
● System fault is present.
● Outside temperature is less than 10°F (-12°C) or
greater than 109°F (43°C).
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the previously listed items.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP
MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
● The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
● To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
● Actual cabin temperature is significantly different
than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
● HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted higher.
● Battery voltage drops too low.
● Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
● A Stop/Start system error occurs.
● Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five
minutes.
● Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
● Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “Stop/
Start OFF” message will appear in instrument cluster
display within the Stop/Start section, and the autostop
function will be disabled
ð
page 129.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back
on.
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
4
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S
TOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/
Start telltale will appear in the Instrument Cluster
Display
ð
page 129.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the vehicle
may not auto start and will need a key start.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is designed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Pressing the clutch pedal
will automatically restart the vehicle.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts. Vehicles
equipped with eTorque contain a heavy duty motor
generator and an additional hybrid electric battery
to store energy from vehicle deceleration for use on
engine startup after a stop as well as providing launch
torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start be disabled during
off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a secondary battery used
to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt vehicle
electrical system. The secondary battery is located
behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
START/STOP MODE
WARNING!
● Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
● Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver
ignition start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT READY
until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are
met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE
mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Mode,
The Following Must Occur:
● The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster
ð
page 129.
● Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
● The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position
and the clutch pedal must be fully released.
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT
AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Situations when the engine will not stop include (but
not limited to):
● Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
● Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or
greater than 109°F (43°C).
● Actual cabin temperature is significantly different
than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
● Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
● Battery is discharged.
● When driving in REVERSE.
● Hood is open.
● Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
● Driver's seat is not occupied or driver’s door is open.
● Vehicle is at high altitude.
● The vehicle is on a steep grade.
● Forward Gear is engaged.
● Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models
Only).
● System fault is present.
● HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the previously listed items.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP
MODE
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine
will start when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not
require complete/full pedal press). The vehicle will go
into STOP/START SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
automatically while in STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
mode
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
● Actual cabin temperature is significantly different
than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
● HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted higher.
● Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five
minutes.
● Battery voltage drops too low.
● Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
● STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
● Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
● Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only).
TO MANU
ALLY TURN OFF THE STOP
/START
SYSTEM
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in the
instrument cluster
ð
page 129.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/
Start system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually turned off, the
engine can only be started and stopped by cycling
the ignition switch.
5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off
and back on.
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
4
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S
TOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/
Start telltale will appear in the Instrument Cluster
Display
ð
page 129.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the vehicle
may not auto start and will need a key start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
● Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
● In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
● Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
The Cruise Control Set Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the on/off button a second time. The Cruise
Control Set Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could
lose control and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator
to pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
● Vehicle parking brake is applied
● Stability event occurs
● Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
● Engine overspeed occurs
● Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)
● Vehicle is operating at a low RPM (manual
transmission only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
NOTE:
● If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
● Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will affect the performance of
the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision
Warning system.
● Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected
ð
page 371.
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
4
WARNING!
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all
road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
● The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
○ On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a vehicle ahead and hold the vehicle
for two seconds in the stop position. If the
vehicle ahead does not start moving within two
seconds, the ACC system will display a message
that the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manually. An
(Continued)
WARNING!
audible chime will sound when the brakes are
released.
● You should not utilize the ACC system:
○ When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving
situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
○ When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
○ When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
○ When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
until one of the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
● System Cancel
● Driver Override
● System Off
● ACC Proximity Warning
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
● ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
● When in 4WD Low
● When the brakes are applied
● When the parking brake is applied
● When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
● When the manual transmission is in FIRST gear
● When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
(manual transmission)
● When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
● When the brakes are overheated
● When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
● When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
● When ESC Full Off mode is active
● When Off Road+ (if equipped) is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32
km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20
mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
ACC system cannot be set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h) or when the vehicle is in
FIRST gear.
NOTE:
● Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER
OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
● If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
4
controlling the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
● The brake pedal is applied
● The CANC button is pushed
● The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
● The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
● The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
● The vehicle parking brake is applied
● The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
● The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
● The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h)
(manual transmission only)
● The clutch is pressed for more than 10 seconds
(manual transmission only)
● The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than 10
seconds (manual transmission only)
● The driver shifts to FIRST gear (manual transmission
only)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
● Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
● Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
● The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
● The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
● The ignition is placed in the OFF position
● 4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the RES
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will show the last
set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32
km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0
km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
● While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system
will cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to
keep the vehicle at a standstill.
● ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure
to follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
● When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
● The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
● The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. In addition,
downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or
descending downhill. This is normal operation and
necessary to maintain set speed. When driving
uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel
if the braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to
the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Increase button and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one
bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by
one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected
in the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the
ACC Set With Target Light. The system will then adjust
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
● The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed
● The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor
● The distance setting is changed
● The system disengages
ð
page 183
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
4
to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle
to a standstill while following a target vehicle, your
vehicle will resume motion without the need for any
driver action if the target vehicle starts moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes
will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning
chime. Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will
cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message
will display on the instrument cluster display and
produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be
required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FR
ONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe
Front Radar Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles,
or ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance items:
● Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
● Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing
so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
● If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
● Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster
display will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera
is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on
the back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstructions, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
“SERVICE ACC/FCW” WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may
need to intervene. The following are examples of these
types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle speed
for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending
on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane in which you are traveling. In the following
lane changing example, ACC has not yet detected the
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
4
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle
until it's too late for the ACC system to take action.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles.
For example, ACC will not react in situations where
the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider
this stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not
previously detect movement from it. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver). For
limitations of this system and recommendations, see
ð
page 192.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear
selector position, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above
the system's operating speed, a warning will appear
within the instrument cluster display indicating the
vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in
the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
ð
page 129. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster
display will show the Park Assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show a single arc moving closer to the vehicle and emit
a fast tone that will change from fast to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in
the left and/or right rear region and will produce a
fast tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
4
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when
the system is detecting an obstacle:
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 79 in-
ches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches (65-30
cm)
Less than 12 in-
ches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2 Second
Tone
(for rear center on-
ly)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center on-
ly)
Fast
(for rear center on-
ly)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARK
SENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch located below
the Uconnect display.
system, the instrument cluster display page 129
will show the “ParkSense Off” message for
approximately five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the “ParkSense
Off” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE
(Not in 4WD Low).
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will remain on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST SYS
TEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear
Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition,
the instrument cluster display will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“ParkSense Unavailable Wiper Rear Sensors” or the
“ParkSense Unavailable Service Required” message.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will show the “ParkSense
Unavailable Wiper Rear Sensors” or “ParkSense
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
4
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
Unavailable Service Required” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If “ParkSense Unavailable Wiper Rear Sensors”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstructions and then cycle the ignition. If
the message continues to appear, see an authorized
dealer.
If “ParkSense Unavailable Service Required” appears
in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized
dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths.
In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the
vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4
inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or
poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
● Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense
system operating properly.
● Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “ParkSense Off.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
● ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
● Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
● Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result
in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “ParkSense Unavailable
Service Required” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
● Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
(Continued)
WARNING!
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
● ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings
of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the
touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle in
the center of the spare tire.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Vehicle button on the Uconnect display.
Then, select Controls and the Back Up Camera
button.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera delay turned on, the rear Camera image will
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, or the touchscreen X button to disable display
of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls
menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal
to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is
initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until
the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
● If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13
km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen X button, the transmission is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
● The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected back up path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the
center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to
a hitch/receiver.
When enabled, fixed guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
(Continued)
WARNING!
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path. You remain responsible at all times for
parking safely while using the ParkView camera.
● To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that
allows you to see an on-screen image of the front view
of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
When enabled, active dynamic tire lines are projected
on the ground plane of the TrailCam view based on the
steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
4
Front View Camera
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
The TrailCam system has programmable settings that
may be selected through the Uconnect system
ð
page 211.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via these methods:
● Press the FWD Camera button on the controls
screen.
● Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the
apps menu.
● Press the TrailCam button on the Off Road Pages.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the Back Up Camera view. The Back Up
Camera view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera Delay turned off and TrailCam view is active,
the TrailCam mode is exited and the previous screen
appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera Delay turned on and the TrailCam view is
active, the TrailCam image will be displayed for up
to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8
mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the
touchscreen X button to disable display of the TrailCam
view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through the
Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle speed is
greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display
timer for the image is initiated. The image will continue
to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10
seconds.
NOTE:
● If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in 2WD or 4WD High, the TrailCam image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen X button, the transmission is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
● The touchscreen X button to disable the display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
● The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of the
vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the Clean Camera button located on the
TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. Washer fluid will
stop when the button is released. In addition, if your
vehicle is equipped with a rear washer system, when
activated, washer fluid will also dispense to wash the
TrailCam.
● The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a
time while holding the button.
● The Clean Camera system is not available when
windshield washing is in process.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of the
vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it
counterclockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
● When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
● After the nozzle shuts off wait five seconds
before removing the fuel nozzle to allow excess
fuel to drain from the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
close fuel filler door.
WARNING!
● Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
● Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper
fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly
fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate, due to fuel
vapors escaping from the system.
● To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
● When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
● Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until
you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap
is properly tightened.
● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly
loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system
detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will
display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap
until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the
odometer reset button to turn the message off. If
the problem persists, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a
damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,
the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem
will turn the MIL off.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
1. Put the vehicle in the PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
4
2. Push the fuel filler door release button (located
below the headlight switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
3. Pushing the button will initiate a sequence of
events to depressurize the fuel system. A message
will display in the cluster when the vehicle is ready
to be fueled.
Instrument Cluster Message
NOTE:
● After pushing the release button you will have
20 minutes to fuel the vehicle; beyond 20
minutes you will need to push the release
button again.
● The fuel door should take 15 seconds to open
under normal conditions. It may take longer to
open in some situations, such as high ambient
temperatures.
● If you hear a hissing sound when the fuel cap is
removed, wait to begin fueling the vehicle until
after the hissing sound stops.
4. The fuel door pops away from the vehicle when it
has been released. To finish opening the fuel door,
manually rotate it away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
● If the service station fuel pump repeatedly
clicks off (stops delivering fuel) before the fuel
tank has been filled, push the fuel door release
button again.
● If pushing the fuel door release button a second
time does not correct the problem, try using
a different fuel pump. If premature fuel pump
shutoff continues to be a problem, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
● If the fuel door does not re-latch upon closure,
push the fuel door release button again to
reset the latch. If pushing the fuel door release
button a second time does not correct the
problem, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door using the inside release
button. Do not pry on the door.
5. Remove the fuel filler cap.
6. Insert the nozzle and fill the vehicle with fuel;
when the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel
tank is full.
7. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle
to allow excess fuel to drain from nozzle.
8. Remove the fuel nozzle, replace the fuel filler cap
by turning until you hear one click, and then close
the fuel door.
NOTE:
● Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn
until you hear one click. This is an indication
that the cap is properly tightened.
● After the click, pull on the cap at the handle to
verify it is secure and fastened.
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
● If it is loose, and not secured to the filler tube,
reinstall and tighten again about a quarter turn
until you hear the click.
● Verify the cap tether is not pinched between the
cap and filler tube.
● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the
yellow Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light and
the “Check Fuel Cap” message will appear in
the instrument cluster.
● Be sure the cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
● Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction
Indicator Light” to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Fuel Door Release
1. Place the vehicle's ignition in the RUN position
(Propulsion System Active (PSA) not active).
NOTE:
If this is not performed, then the tank vent valve
will not open. This will result in premature fuel
pump shutoffs.
2. Access the rear quarter trim panel in the cargo
area on the left side of the vehicle.
Release Cap Location
3. Remove the release cap from the quarter trim
panel.
4. After removing the release cap, pull it directly away
from the quarter trim panel to release the fuel
door.
Fuel Door Emergency Release
5. Reinstall the release cap into the quarter trim
when completed.
6. Wait 15 seconds and then begin fueling your
vehicle.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly
loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system
detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will
display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap
until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the
odometer reset button to turn the message off. If
the problem persists, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a
damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,
the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem
will turn the MIL off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
4
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in
the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready
for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately to
be sure that the load is properly distributed over the
front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show
that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has
been exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear
or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably
do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
ð
page 198.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
ð
page 198.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be installed
between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue. It
typically provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering
more consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to
tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control
and a Weight-Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
● An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
● Weight-Distributing Hitch Systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
4
WARNING!
a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard
for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch
class can tow and should be used to assist you in
selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended
towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Indus-
try Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Du-
ty
10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M
AXIMUM
TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trialer weight
ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
● www.jeep.com
● www.jeep.ca (Canada)
To locate your vehicle towing specs:
1. Select the vehicles drop down to select your
vehicle
2. Select model
3. Select year
4. Select specs
NOTE:
● When using a facia/bumper mounted ball on any
model, the trailer weight is limited to 3,500 lb
(1,588 kg), 30 ft
2
(2.79 m
2
frontal area, and 350
lb (159 kg) tongue weight.
● A fascia/bumper mounted ball should only be
professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
● The tongue weight of the trailer.
● The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
● The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load
on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading
Information Placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines are
recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
● Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
● When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or
damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,
steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
● Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
● Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
● GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● T
otal weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the follo
wing four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
CAUTION!
● Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
● Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80
km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
● Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
● Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
● Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
● Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
● For further information
ð
page 338.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
● Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
● An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
● Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
● Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
● Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
4
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
● Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into the
vehicle's electrical connectors) before launching a
boat into water.
● Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive
clutch slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent
shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does
occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift
control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
AutoStick
● When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance
and avoids frequent downshifts. For example,
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
choose “5” if the desired speed can be maintained.
Choose “4” or “3” if needed to maintain the desired
speed.
● To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or
vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
● Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
● When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
● Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MO
TORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
● Automatic transmis-
sion in PARK.
● Manual transmission
in gear (NOT in NEU-
TRAL [N]).
● Transfer case in (N)
Neutral.
● Tow in forward direc-
tion.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — FOUR
-WHEEL
DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into (N) Neutral,
automatic transmission must be in PARK, and manual
transmission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
● DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
trailer).
● Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to
the transfer case.
● Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
4
CAUTION!
● Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not
in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
● Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into (N) Neutral” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
● Towing this vehicle in violation of the
previously listed requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
● Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
be damaged.
Shifting Into (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
(N) Neutral position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into (N) Neutral.
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on
manual transmissions) for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic
transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in
FIRST gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in (N) Neutral and the engine
running. With the transfer case in (N) Neutral
ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting the
transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of (N) Neutral,
the engine should remain off to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or
place manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage if so equipped.
1. Remove both nuts and bolt from the underside of
the vehicle for each bracket.
Underside Nuts
2. Remove the side step assembly.
Bumper End Cap Removal
The end caps on your vehicle’s front fascia/bumper can
be removed by following the steps listed:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on steel fascia/
bumpers only.
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR bracket
(Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 Torx
bit screwdriver. Do not remove the bolts.
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and
store it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-
road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
4
conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different
effect on your vehicle's steering, handling and traction.
Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful
off-road driving, so always keep a firm grip on the
steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture.
Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most
cases, there are no road signs, posted speed limits
or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use your
own good judgment on what is safe and what is not.
When on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for
surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to
plan your future driving route while remembering what
you are currently driving over.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system and the
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system (if equipped)
be disabled during off-road use.
WARNING!
● Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in
an off-road situation.
● A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach
higher temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly
or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
When To Use 4L Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low speed pulling power. This range should be limited
to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep
inclines, or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4L.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L when operating the vehicle on dry
pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed
driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped
objects, using light brake pressure with light throttle will
keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique
is also used when you need to stop and restart a
vehicle on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
SNOW
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction
at slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low
gear and the transfer case into 4L if necessary. Do
not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop,
try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4
turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle.
This will allow the tires to get fresh traction and help
maintain your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine
braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
MUD
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the
tires and is very difficult to get through. You should
use DRIVE, with the transfer case in the 4L position
to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to a
stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a
1/4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction.
Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage
and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice
before entering any mud hole, get out and determine
how deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if
the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.
SAND
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop.
The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate
tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt
maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's momentum.
If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas
or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of
15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your
traction and handling while driving on the soft sand, but
you must return the tires to normal air pressure before
driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure
you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing
the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating
and total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk
of tire unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure,
reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
High Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types
of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your
ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes
wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring
the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
USING A SPOTTER
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining
the correct path can be extremely difficult when you
are confronting many obstacles. In these cases have
someone guide you over, through, or around the
obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance in front
of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires
and undercarriage, and guide you through.
CROSSING LARGE ROCKS
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle.
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the
side wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks
with your tires.
CAUTION!
● Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
● Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
CROSSING A RAVINE, GULLY, DITCH,
WASHOUT OR RUT
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-
degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to
cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle
great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If
you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right
or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires.
Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout
you just created. You should now be able to drive out
following the trench you just created at a 45-degree
angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
CROSSING LOGS
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front
tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts
to climb the log. While climbing the log, modulate your
brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out
from under your tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log
using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
GETTING HIGH-CENTERED
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get
out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle
is hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody
and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle.
Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
4
vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the
weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle
down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching
the vehicle off the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are
just too steep to climb and should not be attempted.
You should always feel confident with the vehicle and
your abilities. You should always climb hills straight up
and down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
BEFORE CLIMBING A STEEP HILL
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the
traction is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up
and down? What is on top and the other side? Are
there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles on the
path? Can you safely recover the vehicle if something
goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel
confident, shift the transmission into a lower gear with
4L engaged, and proceed with caution, maintaining
your momentum as you climb the hill.
DRIVING UP HILL
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you
start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep
grade; the abrupt change of grade could cause you
to lose control. If the front end begins to bounce,
ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires
back on the ground. As you approach the crest of the
hill, ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the
top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the steering wheel no more than
a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide
fresh traction into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not
make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine
if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow,
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the
hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If
you feel confident in your ability to proceed, then make
sure you are in 4L and proceed with caution. Allow
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
DRIVING ACROSS AN INCLINE
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across
an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels,
which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or
rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with
firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline
at an angle heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
IF YOU STALL OR BEGIN TO LOSE HEADWAY
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and
shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
(Continued)
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping
and rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe
injury. Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across
a hill, always drive straight up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of
water. Water crossings should be avoided, if possible,
and only be attempted when necessary in a safe,
responsible manner. Only drive through areas which
are designated and approved. Tread lightly and avoid
damage to the environment. Know your vehicle's
abilities and be able to recover it if something goes
wrong. Never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
deep water unless you ingested water into the engine
air intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt to
restart it. Determine if it has ingested water first.
The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift into
FIRST gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L position
and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed of
{3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle.
Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate
through the crossing. After crossing any water higher
than the bottom of the axle differentials, inspect all of
the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
● Water ingestion into the axles, transmission,
transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur
if you drive too fast or through too deep of water.
Water can cause permanent damage to engine,
driveline or other vehicle components, and your
brakes will be less effective once wet and/or
muddy.
● When driving through water, do not exceed 5
mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth before
entering as a precaution, and check all fluids
afterward. Driving through water may cause
damage that may not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
BEFORE YOU CROSS ANY TYPE OF WATER
As you approach any type of water, you need to
determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly.
If necessary, get out and walk through the water or
probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its
depth, approach angle, current and bottom condition.
Be careful of murky or muddy waters; check for hidden
obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding on any
wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle if necessary.
The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current
and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle
will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the
vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the
depth and the ability to safely cross.
CROSSING PUDDLES, POOLS, FLOODED
AREAS OR O
THER STANDING W
ATER
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make
it difficult to determine an accurate water depth,
approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy
water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps
prior to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and
easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you
can safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow
method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
CROSSING DITCHES, STREAMS, SHALLOW
RIVERS OR OTHER FLOWING W
ATER
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never
attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in
shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your
vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even
in very shallow water, a high current can still wash the
dirt out from around your tires putting you and your
vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal
injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents
in depths greater than the vehicle's running ground
clearance. You should never attempt to cross flowing
water which is deeper than the vehicle's running ground
clearance. Even the slowest current can push the
heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if the
water is deep enough to push on the large surface area
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
4
of the vehicle's body. Before you proceed, determine
the speed of the current, the water's depth, approach
angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles.
Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using
the low and slow technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
is always a good idea to check for damage. That way
you can get any problems taken care of right away and
have your vehicle ready when you need it.
● Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
and exhaust system for damage.
● Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
● Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
● Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals,
and propeller shafts.
● After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual
transmission bell housing for mud and debris and
clean as required.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your
brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
● If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels
for impacted material. Impacted material can cause
a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5 NAV
With 12.3-inch Display, refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working
with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate
steps as needed. As always, if you experience unusual
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately,
ð
page 369, or refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for additional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
● ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
● As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of
a security breach, vehicle owners should routinely
check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons
on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate
located on the center of the instrument panel. These
buttons allow you to access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can vary by
vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and change
settings. Push the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12.3-inch
Display Touchscreen And Faceplate Butt
ons
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
MULTIMEDIA 211
5
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab at the top of the touchscreen. In this menu,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
● All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Clus-
ter Display. The available languages are Español (Mexico), English (United States),
Italiano, and Français (Canada).
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set
it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options
are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show Themes in Light or Dark mode. "Auto"
changes the theme with the headlights.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
212 MULTIMEDIA
showing that setting has been selected. Once the
setting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to
the screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Setting Name Description
Units This setting will allow you to customize the units for “Speed” (mph or km/h), “Dis-
tance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque” (Nm or lb-ft)
units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Display Brightness Nighttime Only available if Display Mode is set to “Manual”. This setting will allow you to adjust
the “Brightness Nighttime” setting. Selectable options are 1 through 10.
Display Brightness Daytime Only available if Display Mode is set to “Manual”. This setting will allow you to adjust
the “Brightness Daytime” setting. Selectable options are 1 through 10.
Cluster Options This settings allows users to select which content to display in each customizable area
on the Instrument Cluster Display.
Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume This setting will let you adjust the Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume. Selectable options
are “Low”, “Mid”, and “High”.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 213
5
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Clus-
ter Display. The available languages are Español (Mexico), English (United States),
Italiano, and Français (Canada).
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows
for more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Nighttime This setting will allow you to adjust the “Brightness Nighttime” setting. Selectable
options are 1 through 10.
Display Brightness Daytime This setting will allow you to adjust the “Brightness Daytime” setting. Selectable
options are 1 through 10.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options
are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show Themes in Light or Dark mode. "Auto"
changes the theme with the headlights.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units This setting will allow you to customize the units for “Speed” (mph or km/h), “Dis-
tance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque” (Nm or lb-ft)
units of measurement independently.
214 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Navigation Settings This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for further information.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Radio Off Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
min” and “20 min”.
MULTIMEDIA 215
5
Setting Name Description
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings. For more informa-
tion about audio settings, please refer to the Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume This setting will let you adjust the Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume. Selectable options
are “Low”, “Mid”, and “High”.
Auto-On Comfort This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
216 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an
audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will
provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Sub-
menu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in
view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW
system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the
FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected
and can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
MULTIMEDIA 217
5
Setting Name Description
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will provide braking assistance if the Rear ParkSense system senses a
collision with an object.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting
will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime”
setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has
changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Drowsy Driver Alert This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes,
indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will customize the Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Front Passenger Airbag This setting will let you enable or disable the Front Passenger Airbag.
218 MULTIMEDIA
Electric Drive
When the Electric Drive button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the electric vehicle.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Ready Drive Pop-up
This setting will enable or disable the Ready to Drive Pop-ups related to the electric
vehicle.
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will
control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format. You will also
be able to adjust the clock.
MULTIMEDIA 219
5
Setting Name Description
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or
smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All Settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
220 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options
are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep”.
Voice Barge-In This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is
completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List
and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will
turn the Command List off.
Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
MULTIMEDIA 221
5
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
222 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
● When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Illuminated Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 223
5
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
or off.
224 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or
the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Heated Seat & Steering Wheel This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
AUX Switches
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches.
There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power source for the AUX
switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from the “Ignition”. In addition
to setting the type and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous
state at which the AUX switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to
“On” or “Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the
power source is set to Ignition.
MULTIMEDIA 225
5
Key Off Options
After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned on.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/
right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
226 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the
volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”,
“1”, “2”, and “3”.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Popups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
phone on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 227
5
Setting Name Description
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone
on or off.
Navigation Popups This setting turns navigation pop-ups on or off.
SiriusXM
®
Setup
When the SiriusXM
®
Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM
®
satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip
specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
● A subscription to SiriusXM
®
satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM
®
Account, Profile, And Se
ttings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM
®
Settings menu within the SiriusXM
®
menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
228 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projec-
tion. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed
to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
Version Information When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
information about the version of your radio.
MULTIMEDIA 229
5
Setting Name Description
License Information When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
licensing information of your radio.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are
in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on
in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within
the vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is
recommended that the volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using the
Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
230 MULTIMEDIA
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted
in some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on
the wireless radio.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, it will
provide you vehicle status information while operating
on off-road conditions. It supplies information relating
to the status of the drivetrain, transfer case, coolant/oil
gauges, pitch and roll of the vehicle, and access to the
trailcam system.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road button
on the touchscreen.
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the dynamics of the vehicle.
The following information is displayed:
● Steering angle in degrees
● Status of Transfer Case
● Status of the Rear Axle
● Status of the Front Axle
● Status of the Sway Bar
Vehicle Dynamics Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Sway Bar
3 — Transfer Case Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
5 — Front Axle Locker Status
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status
of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature,
Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission
Temperature (Automatic Transmissions Only), and
Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Oil Temperature
2 — Coolant Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Transmission Temperature (Automatic
Transmissions Only)
5 — Battery Voltage
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
MULTIMEDIA 231
5
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
TRAILCAM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that
allows you to see an on-screen image of the front view
of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the TrailCam button on the
touchscreen.
TrailCam Activation
TRAIL RECORDING — IF EQUIPPED
Overview
The Trail Recording feature can be accessed from a
variety of different ways: Within the Vehicle Dashboard
screen, from the App Drawer menu, within the Off-
Road Pages Vehicle Dynamics tab, or from the Start
Recording feature within the Adventure Guides app.
There will be options within “Trail Recording” where you
can start recording your trail or view saved recordings
where you can see previous trails recorded.
Recording A Trail And Stop Recording
To start recording a trail, select “Start Recording”
towards the bottom of the touchscreen. Once selected,
your trail will start recording for as long as desired.
When the trail is over, press “Stop Recording”. Select
whether to save the trail in which the trail will be
saved and will appear in “Saved Recordings”. Selecting
“Cancel” will not save the trail, and the trail will be
deleted.
NOTE:
After 30 miles (48 km) a notification will appear on the
touchscreen asking if you want to keep recording.
Adding a Waypoint
On the bottom left-hand side of the touchscreen select
“Add Waypoint” from the trail recording screen. This
will allow the user to pin a location along the trail,
both during and after the recording. There are three
selectable options to mark a Waypoint: A Waypoint can
be placed whether the vehicle is in or out of motion,
but can only be edited when the vehicle is not moving.
As a default, Waypoints are named chronologically in
the order in which the Waypoints are marked or added.
They can be renamed later by pressing the edit icon
located to the right of the defaulted Waypoint name.
● Places
● Obstacle
● Guidance
NOTE:
A Waypoint can be placed whether or not the vehicle is
in motion, but can only be edited when the vehicle is
not moving.
Expand/Collapse View
While in the Trail Recording screen, press the Expand
button located to the right of the Map View to
enlarge the Trail Map screen during recordings. Once
in expanded view, press the collapse icon which will
shrink the trail map during screen recordings.
Editing A Trail
After finishing recording a trail, there will be a scale to
rate the difficulty of the trail for future reference. The
scale is from 1-10 with one being the easiest and 10
being the most difficult.
NOTE:
Setting the difficulty is not required to save the trail and
can be edited afterwards.
Editing/Deleting a Waypoint
To edit a Waypoint, select the desired Waypoint on
the map. Once selected, choose the type of Waypoint.
Once selected, choose a sub-type that describes the
232 MULTIMEDIA
Waypoint. Waypoint sub-types are listed in the following
table:
Places Obstacles Guidance
Camping Mud Bare Left
Scenic View Rock Bare Right
Staging Area Sand Dead End
Trailhead Steep Ascent Hard Left
Water Steep Descent Hard Right
Water Slow
Route Closure
Waypoints can be renamed later by pressing the pencil
icon located to the right of the defaulted Waypoint
name. Selecting the pencil icon will bring up a keyboard
which will allow you to customize the Waypoint name.
NOTE:
Editing Waypoints is not available while the vehicle is
in motion. To edit and customize Waypoints the vehicle
must not be in motion.
If you want to Delete a Waypoint, select the Waypoint
that you created and press the delete Waypoint button
located towards the bottom of your touchscreen. The
pop-up, “Your waypoint was deleted successfully” will
appear on your touchscreen once the Waypoint was
successfully deleted.
After selecting a saved recording, options will be
available to view, edit, delete, or export the recording
onto a USB device. Pressing “View Performance Data”
will showcase the vehicle’s pitch, roll, altitude, and
location for each selected Waypoint. A Snapshot feature
is available, where a photo of the performance data can
be exported to a connected USB device.
Export a Recording onto a USB
After selecting a saved recording, press the Export
button towards the bottom of the touchscreen and
select the USB icon option. There will be a pop-up
MULTIMEDIA 233
5
Saving And Canceling A Trail
When finished editing a trail select “Save”. The trail will
be stored in the Saved Recordings tab.
Selecting “Cancel” will delete the trail, and a pop-up
screen will appear asking if you are sure that you want
to cancel your current trail recording. Selecting “No,
Don’t Cancel”, or the X button, will take you back to the
Waypoint editing screen. Selecting “Yes, Cancel” will
discard the selected trail recording.
Saved Trails
To view previously saved trails, click the Saved
Recordings button on the Trail Recording home page.
Once entering Saved Recordings, a list of previously
saved trails will be listed. The Remove Icon button to
the far right of each trail will delete the trail. To delete
all trails select “Delete All” towards the bottom of the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
Saved recordings can be accessed even once the Brand
connected services subscription has expired.
message afterwards stating whether or not the export
was successful.
ADVENTURE GUIDES — IF EQUIPPED
To access the Adventure Guides feature, press
the Vehicle icon on the lower menu bar of your
touchscreen. From the Vehicle Dashboard, press
“Adventure Guides”.
1. Press the search box and enter an address or
keyword.
Search For An Off-Road Trail
NOTE:
● An active subscription to Brand Connect
connected services is required to access the
Adventure Guides feature. If you do not have an
active subscription, click the Register button on
the touchscreen and follow the prompts.
● If there is no network connection, a message
will display on your touchscreen, “Data
connection temporarily not available. Please try
again later.” Press “OK”, and ensure there is a
stable network connection.
● If there are no search results within the area
in which you added the address or keyword,
the message “No Results Found” will display on
your touchscreen.
2. The distance to each search result will appear on
the left of each destination. The difficulty level
of each trail will show towards the right of each
destination. Select the trail you wish to navigate to.
Trail Difficulty
NOTE:
● Press the Map View button to view an expanded
summary of each trail and its difficulty level.
Map View Button
Expanded Trail Difficulty View
3. Press the Preview Trail button to view the trail
info. Press the Start Recording button which will
bring you to the Trail Recording app landing page
where you will be able to save the recording, view
saved recordings, and see the distance to your
destination.
Preview Trail
NOTE:
Pressing the Back arrow on the Trail Info page will
bring you back to the trail detail screen.
4. Press the “Go Here” button which will send the
directions to your TomTom Navigation system.
Go Here Navigation Button
5. If the trail does not exist within your Uconnect
system’s local memory, press the Download
button. If the trail already exists, meaning it has
already been downloaded at some point, press the
Check For Updates button.
The following are the different pages that are
unique to each Trail Info page:
NOTE:
● Highlights: Provides general information on
the trail name, trails difficulty range, and
experience icons.
234
MULTIMEDIA
To search for an off-road trail:
● Advanced Rating System: Provides information
such as recommended vehicle for the trail
and a “Concerns” tab that provides information
about what to be prepared for when driving on
the selected trail. Only the Concerns that are
highlighted are applicable to the trail.
● Technical Rating: Provides a brief description of
the trail as well as a “Mandatory” rating and
an “Optional” rating. Next to each rating is an
“i” icon that provides a rating legend for trail
difficulty with 1 being the easiest and 10 being
the most difficult.
● Waypoints: The last page provides information
on different Waypoints along the trail such as
distance from selected Waypoint and navigation
routes to other Waypoints along the trail.
NOTE:
● “Trail Updated Successfully” will display towards
the top of your touchscreen if the trail update
was completed properly. If “Trail could not
update. Not enough space” appears, you will
need to clear up space under your “Downloaded
Trails” by removing trails that are no longer
needed or desired. “No Updates available”
means the trail you have selected is up-to-date.
● Pressing “X” on any of these screens will take
you back to the trail details screen.
Trails Near You
The Trails Near You feature will show the first 20 trails
based on 500 miles (805 km) within your current
vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
If there are no trails within a 500-mile (805-km) radius
within your current vehicle’s location, “No Results
Found” will appear on your touchscreen.
Preloaded Trails
Press “Preloaded Trails” to see a list of trails that are
preloaded onto your Uconnect system.
Preloaded Trails
NOTE:
“Preloaded Trails” cannot be deleted from the list, as
they are the default trails that remain on your system
permanently.
Downloaded Trails
Any trail that you wish to download, press the Download
button on the trail you have selected.
NOTE:
● “Trail Downloaded Successfully” will display towards
the top of your touchscreen if the trail was
downloaded properly. Once the download has been
successful, “Check for updates” will be available if
you wish to check the trail for updates.
● “Downloaded Trails Full. Free up some space” will
display towards the top of your touchscreen if there
is not enough space. Press the Downloaded Trails
button to remove existing trails.
Press the Remove icon to remove a trail from the list.
You will be presented with a confirmation, “Are you sure
you want to delete this trail?”. Press “Yes” to show
the selected trail was deleted successfully, or press
“No” or the X button which will bring you back to the
Downloaded Trails list.
Remove Downloaded Trails
Go All Access
Selecting the “Go All Access” button on the main
Adventure Guides page will display the Manage Account
screen. On this screen you can purchase an All Access
membership which provides the entire catalog of
offroad trails. A QR code will be present on the screen
to purchase a All Access membership.
NOTE:
If a trail has a grayed out icon to the far right, that
indicates that an All Access membership is required in
order to view the trail.
MULTIMEDIA 235
5
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
● ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
● Brake pedal pulsations
● A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
● The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
● Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
● The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
● The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
● The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
AUDIBLE PEDESTRIAN WARNING SYSTEM - IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with an Audible Pedestrian
Warning system. The Audible Pedestrian Warning
system uses distinct sounds to alert pedestrians that
your vehicle is approaching. In addition, the system
will indicate changes in vehicle speed by varying the
relative volume.
The system uses two external speakers. One is located
in the under-hood compartment and the other is in
the rear of the vehicle. The Audible Pedestrian Warning
236 SAFETY
system is active when the vehicle is not in PARK
and is traveling at lower speeds. Depending on the
selected gear (REVERSE, DRIVE, or NEUTRAL), the
system activates the corresponding speaker location
based on the intended direction of travel.
NOTE:
The system is active when driving in Electric mode only.
WARNING!
The Audible Pedestrian Warning system is not
intended to avoid a collision. It is always the driver's
responsibility to be attentive to the vehicle’s distance
between other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly utilize brake operation to ensure
safe driving of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning could result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA) — I
F
EQUIPPED
RSRA alerts you through visual and auditory
notifications of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats if a rear door was
opened up to 10 minutes before the ignition was placed
in the ON/RUN position. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. When
the previous conditions are met, RSRA displays the
message “Check Rear Seat” on the instrument cluster
display and sounds an auditory alert upon the driver
placing the ignition in the OFF.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
ð
page 211.
WARNING!
● Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then place the vehicle in the PARK
position and apply the parking brake.
● Always make sure the power button is in the OFF
position, key fob is removed from the vehicle and
vehicle is locked.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS). These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill Descent
Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
SAFETY 237
6
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift,
it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel
lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other
factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway,
or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
(if equipped)
ð
page 238.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially
those that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract these conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
● Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
● Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
● Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
● Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively
affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade
(Continued)
238 SAFETY
WARNING!
ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
“ESC On” is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will
be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only
be used for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
and release of the button will toggle the ESC modes.
Multiple attempts may be required to return to “ESC
On”.
WARNING!
● When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be
illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled,
and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
● Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
hold the ESC OFF button for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate, and the “ESC Off” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is active
when "Full Off" mode is enabled by the driver, ESC will
not switch to "Partial Off" mode at any speed and will
remain in "Full Off" mode until Off Road+ is exited or
ESC is re-enabled by the driver.
WARNING!
● In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only.
● The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is turned to the “ESC
On” mode. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles (km)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
SAFETY 239
6
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the customer has
elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in
a reduced mode.
NOTE:
● The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
● Each time the ignition is place in the ON position,
the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from
a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will
continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period.
If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time
expires, the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
● The feature must be enabled.
● The vehicle must be stopped.
● The parking brake must be off.
● The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are
attached, then the door must be closed. If the doors
are detached then the driver's seat belt must be
buckled.)
● The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
● The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
● HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the
transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is
pressed, HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
(Continued)
WARNING!
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to
ð
page 211 for further
information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
● If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually
activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
● HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK (P).
● Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
240 SAFETY
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield
wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there
is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction
is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur
by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD
Low only. SSC maintains vehicle speed
by actively controlling engine torque and
brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
● The driveline is in 4WD Low.
● The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
● The parking brake is released.
● The driver door is closed (If doors are attached, the
door must be closed. If doors are detached, the
driver seat belt must be buckled).
● The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
the following conditions are met:
● The driver releases the throttle.
● The driver releases the brake.
● The driver seat belt is buckled.
● The transmission is in any selection other than
PARK.
● Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
● The driver door is closed. (If doors are attached,
the door must be closed. If doors are detached, the
driver seat belt must be buckled).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally,
the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a
grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on
the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the
SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
● 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
● 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
● 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
● 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
● 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
● 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
● 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
● 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
● 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
● REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
● NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
● PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
SSC Target Set Speeds — If Equipped With Off Road+
● 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
● 2nd = 0.9 mph (1.5 km/h)
● 3rd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
● 4th = 1.5 mph (2.5 km/h)
● 5th = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
● 6th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
● 7th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
● 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
● REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
SAFETY 241
6
● NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
● PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
● During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used
for SSC target speed selection but will not
affect the gear chosen by the transmission. While
actively controlling SSC, the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and
corresponding driving conditions.
● SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive mode
if active. The differences may be notable to the
driver as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
● The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
● The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
● The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
● The driver pushes the SSC switch.
● The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
● The parking brake is applied.
● The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
● The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64
km/h). SSC will exist immediately.
● The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if doors
are attached or driver seat belt is unbuckled if doors
are detached).
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has a light that offers feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
● The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated.
These are the normal operating conditions for SSC.
● The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enabled conditions are not met.
● The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
● The cluster icon and switch light will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
(Continued)
WARNING!
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to
be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
ð
page 199.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
242 SAFETY
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is
in any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m).
The zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror
and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the
rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
● The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
● The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change
if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your
vehicle and trailer before making a lane change.
If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports
equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle,
this may result in the BSM Warning Light remaining
illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward
gear
ð
page 211.
● The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side
mirror warning indicator light when a motorcycle or
any small object remains at the side of the vehicle
for extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminants accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located.
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle
is operated in areas with extremely low radar returns
such as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop.
If blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners” message will display
in the cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and
BSM and RCP alerts will not occur. This is normal
operation. The system will automatically recover and
resume function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.) and keep it clear of road contaminants.
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding
an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
ð
page 245.
SAFETY 243
6
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traff
ic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains
in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls,
foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and
your vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
ð
page 369.
244 SAFETY
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking
lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot
(Continued)
WARNING!
situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up,
even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spo
t Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of
the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present
on the same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
SAFETY 245
6
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Door Removal
When either the front driver or passenger door is
removed, the instrument cluster will display “Blind
Spot Temporarily Unavailable” and the BSM system
will disable. While the system will continue to indicate
whatever blind spot mode it was previously in within
the Uconnect system, no visual or audible alerts
will be provided. As long as the doors are removed,
the instrument cluster will provide the “Blind Spot
Temporarily Unavailable” pop-up as a reminder that the
system is disabled every time the ignition is cycled.
Upon re-installation of both doors, the system will
resume functionality based on the personalized mode
selected.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW
)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver
with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a haptic
warning in the form of a brake jerk, to warn the
driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough
time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When
the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings as well as a possible haptic warning in
the form of a brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision
by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force,
the system will compensate and provide additional
brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
ð
page 369.
NOTE:
● The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph (5
km/h).
● The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
● It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
● The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings.
● FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
246 SAFETY
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rate of speed.
● FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. In rare
situations, the system may react to surrounding
objects such as tunnels, bridges, guardrails, etc.
The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision
by controlling the vehicle via braking, steering,
and acceleration. Unintended braking reactions can
always be overridden by pressing down hard on the
accelerator. Failure to follow this warning could lead
to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW setting menu can be adjusted through the
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 211
.
● To turn the FCW system on, select between “Only
Warning” and “Warning and Braking” in the FCW
menu.
● Select “OFF” in the FCW menu to turn the FCW
system off.
NOTE:
● When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front.
● When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system from
warning the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF”
will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
● When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited active
braking, or additional brake support if the driver is
not braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision.
● When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous
braking.
● The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shutdown.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
ð
page
211.
● Far
○ When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far”
setting, this allows the system to warn the driver
of a possible more distant collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings.
○ More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent
warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number
of FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
● Medium
○ When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting, this allows the system to warn
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings.
● Near
○ When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near”
setting, this allows the system to warn the driver
of a possible closer collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings.
○ This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
○ More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number
of FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the
active braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is no
longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
SAFETY 247
6
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
● ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
● Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until the
tire is inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases,
the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should
always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See
ð
page 338 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving
the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning
Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value
ð
page 344.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
● The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor
is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels,
and may contribute to a poor overall system
performance. Customers are encouraged to use
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to
ensure TPMS feature operation.
● Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
● After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
(Continued)
248 SAFETY
CAUTION!
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
● The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
● The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert or Selectable
Tire Fill Alert feature.
● Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
● The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
Warning Light.
● Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,
mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and
to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
● Receiver module
● Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
● Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
● Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low"
message for a minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate
to XX" message and a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value
as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to
their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
SAFETY 249
6
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display
a "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
not being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer
flash, and the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM”
message will no longer display, and a pressure value
will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can
occur due to any of the following:
● Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
● Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals
● Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
● Using tire chains on the vehicle
● Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With A Full-Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-
size spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor, and can be
monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) when swapped with a low pressure road
tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire
is swapped with a low pressure road tire, the
next ignition switch cycle will still show the TPMS
Warning Light to be on, a chime to sound, an
Inflate to XX message to appear in the instrument
cluster, and the graphic display will still show the
low tire pressure value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15
mph (24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Warning
Light as long as none of road tires are below the
low pressure warning threshold.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on
your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on.
The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display dashes
(--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes
(--) will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display
the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and
then display pressure values in place of the dashes.
On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long
as no system fault exists.
TIRE FILL ALERT
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire
Fill Alert feature in the customer settings menu of the
Uconnect system.
NOTE:
● Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the
Tire Fill Alert system.
● The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system
is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects
an increase in tire pressure while filling the tire.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with the
transmission in PARK for vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission. For vehicles equipped with
250 SAFETY
a manual transmission, the parking brake must be
applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter
Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle
is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps do not
come on while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor may be in an inoperative
position, preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being
received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be
moved slightly forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Operation:
● The horn will chirp once to let the user know when
to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended
pressure.
● The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the
user continues to inflate the tire.
● The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
● The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature is set to “Disabled” every time
the ignition is turned to “OFF”. To re-enable the Tire
Fill Alert feature at the next ignition “RUN” state, the
customer must re-enable the feature through use of the
customer settings in the radio.
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA) — IF
EQUIPPED
The STFA system is an optional feature that is included
as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system
is designed to allow you to select a pressure to inflate
or deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to,
and to provide feedback while inflating or deflating the
vehicle's tires.
NOTE:
To use the STFA feature, the Tire Fill Alert feature must
be enabled through use of the customer settings in the
radio.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you
will be able to select a pressure setting for both the
front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a
pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for
each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for each
axle in the Uconnect system application as preset
pressure values. Up to two sets of preset pressure
values can be stored in the Uconnect system for the
front and rear axle. Once you select the tire pressures
for the front and rear axles that you want to inflate or
deflate to, you can begin inflating or deflating one tire
at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating
one tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission
in PARK in vehicles with an automatic transmission,
and in NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in
vehicles with a manual transmission. The hazard lamps
will come on to confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert
mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If
the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or
deflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor may be in an inoperative position, preventing
the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In this
case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly forward
or backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the
following STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
pressure is reached to let you know when to stop
inflating or deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overinflated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is added or removed to reach proper selected
pressure level.
SAFETY 251
6
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FEATURES
● Seat Belt Systems
● Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
● Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position
ð
page
269.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far back as
possible and use the proper child restraint
ð
page 269.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front
air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the
space between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see your Owner Handbook for customer service
contact information.
WARNING!
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce
the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused
by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor
vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
252 SAFETY
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will
signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat
belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal
or other items are placed on the outboard front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained
in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
● Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
● In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
● It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
(Continued)
SAFETY 253
6
WARNING!
● Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
● A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
● A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists.
If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
● A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into
the buckle nearest you.
● A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
● A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
(Continued)
WARNING!
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the
arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
● A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
● A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat
(for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to
allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
254 SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract
to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins
immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot
at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears
the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
(Continued)
SAFETY 255
6
WARNING!
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
● Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
● Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
● ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when
the lap belt is not long enough and only use in
the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front and second row outboard seat belt systems
are equipped with pretensioning devices that are
designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the
event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from
the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for
all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced
immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front and second row outboard seat belt systems
are equipped with an Energy Management feature that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system. The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position
ð
page 276.
256 SAFETY
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor Locations (Tw
o-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor Locations (Four
-Door Models)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull
the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear
a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract
to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
● The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
● Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
● Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
SAFETY 257
6
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Front and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first
in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a
malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs,
have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
● The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
● The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
● The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared.
In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately
ð
page 139.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front
air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger front
air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above
the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
258 SAFETY
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
● Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and type
of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(OCS) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed
to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight.
It is designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants
whose seated weight classifies them in a category other
than a properly seated adult. This could be a child,
teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light (an
amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells
the driver and front passenger when the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD
Indicator Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light
is NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
● No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
● Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
● Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
SAFETY 259
6
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some
that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full
size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it
takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It
is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s
seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied
seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies
them in a category other than a properly seated adult.
This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of
The Following:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
● Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light
– an amber light located on the overhead sports
bar
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
uses the classification to determine whether it should
activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as designed,
it is important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly
seated passengers are:
● Sitting upright
● Facing forward
● Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
● Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
Seated Properly
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates
that:
● The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it.
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint.
260 SAFETY
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat.
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child or small adult.
● The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled In-
dicator Light
(“P
AD”) Status
Front Passenger
Air Bag Status
Unoccupied
seat* Unbuck-
led
NOT ILLUMINAT-
ED
DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied
seat* Buckled
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags,
heavy briefcas-
es, and other
relatively light
objects
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing
child re-
straint**
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled In-
dicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger
Air Bag Status
Child, including
a child in a for-
ward-facing
child restraint
or booster
seat**
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Properly seated
adult
NOT ILLUMINAT-
ED
ACTIVATED
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt
is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy even though the PAD System Indicator Light
is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint
system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
WARNING!
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located on
the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and front
passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator light illuminates
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy
during a collision. When the front passenger seat is
empty or when very light objects are placed on the
seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when
an adult passenger is properly seated in the front
passenger seat. The driver and adult passenger should
verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated
when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat. If an
adult is not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced
SAFETY 261
6
Front Air Bag may deactivate and the PAD Indicator
Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be
deactivated for most properly seated and restrained
children in the passenger seat and for most properly
installed child restraint systems. However, under
certain conditions, even with a properly installed child
restraint system, the PAD Indicator Light may not be
illuminated, even though the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag is deactivated. This can occur if the child
restraint is lighter than the lightest weight necessary to
illuminate the PAD Indicator Light. NEVER assume the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD
Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger
seat and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the
passenger may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps
below to allow the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s
seated weight to activate the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger
step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger
seat, such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat
massagers, blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the
seat, with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or
near the floor, and with their back against the
seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain
in this seated position for two to three minutes
after restarting the vehicle.
WARNING!
● If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately. Failure
to do so may cause serious injury or death. If
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF," the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event
of a collision.
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
● Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore,
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not
be activated for a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult (depending on size) who is seated in the
passenger seat. This does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or
deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated
with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an
adult is in the front passenger seat, have the passenger
reposition his or her body in the seat until the PAD
Indicator Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s
Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS
determines the most probable classification of the
occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front
passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight,
which may result in deactivation or activation of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on
the front passenger seat may result in deactivation of
262 SAFETY
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious
injury or death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in
activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
● The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest
or instrument panel).
● The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
● The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
● The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
● Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
● Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
● Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
● Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for
example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
● If a child restraint system, child, small teenager
or adult in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
(Continued)
SAFETY 263
6
WARNING!
occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
● Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different than the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, which
may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of
the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or stays on after you start the
vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle
to an authorized dealer for service immediately.
WARNING!
● Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light
does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
(Continued)
WARNING!
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
● Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
● If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the
PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate to show that the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this
occur, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This
indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger,
the OCS components must function as designed. Do
not make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
● Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
● Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the
vehicle.
● Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
● Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
● At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related component
or fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
● Unapproved modifications or service procedures
to the passenger seat assembly, its related
components, seat cover, or cushion may
inadvertently change the air bag deployment in
case of a frontal collision. This could result in
death or serious injury to the front passenger
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
● If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air
bags.
264 SAFETY
WARNING!
● Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
● Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on
a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge
of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure
occupants if they are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
SAFETY 265
6
WARNING!
● Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free
from any obstructions.
● In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated
to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of
the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the
passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
● Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
● Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
● Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured
or killed.
● Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Front and Side Impact Sensors
266 SAFETY
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
● The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants
as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions
are similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They
are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly. However,
if you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
● As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these
particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
● Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
● After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
● Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
● Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
● Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
● Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from
the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
● Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced
Accident Response System:
● Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
● Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the START or ON/OFF position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by
SAFETY 267
6
following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure — GAS
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to
ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure — PHEV
After an event occurs requiring activation of the
Enhanced Accident Response System, when the system
is active, a “Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle System”
message will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
The vehicle is not drivable in this state.
In order to reset the high voltage battery and engine,
the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
immediately to be inspected and have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
In order to immediately reset the hazard flashers,
interior lights, power door locks, or the HVAC blower
motor, the ignition switch must be changed from START
or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
● Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
● It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
● Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
268 SAFETY
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According
to crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
(Continued)
WARNING!
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
● For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–
888–327–4236
● Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information: https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/
services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
SAFETY 269
6
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing
direction are for children who are over two years old
or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
● Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or
rearward because it can loosen the child restraint
attachments. Remove the child restraint before
adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the
vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
● When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or
seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
270 SAFETY
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back
of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the
front of the vehicle seat while the child is still
sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt,
check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat
belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching
can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position
the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether An-
chor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
SAFETY 271
6
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install
the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
272 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
Two Door Models – No Center Seating Position
Four Door Models – Yes
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints with flex-
ible lower anchors in the center position. The inner an-
chorages are 18.5 inches (484 mm) apart. Do not install
child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center
position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door Models — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if
it interferes with the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see
ð
page 67.
SAFETY 273
6
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes
with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it (Two-Door Models).
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback. They are just
visible when you lean into the rear seat
to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if
you run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion. If your vehicle is equipped with
anchorage symbols on the seatback, they will be
located just above the lower anchorages.
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
Four-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
274 SAFETY
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on
each side. Each will have a hook or connector to
attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten
the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Two-Door Models:
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Four-Door Models:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, webbing
mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear
seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other,
you must use the seat belt for the center position.
You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in the
outboard positions.
Please see
ð
page 275 for typical installation
instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the
seat belt, following the instructions below. See
ð
page 276 to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on
the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat
can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for
the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See
ð
page 279 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if
they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
SAFETY 275
6
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the
LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled
seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and
then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
● Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-
fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses,
or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it
is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor
can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the
webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked,
the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)”
ð
page 256 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections
for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor
Locations (Two-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
276 SAFETY
Automatic Locking Retractor
Locations (Four-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat? Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if
it interferes with the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see
ð
page 67.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
SAFETY 277
6
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes
with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it (Two-Door Models).
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined,
you may recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the
belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step
5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. See
ð
page 279 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
278 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat, including
the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach
the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the
tether anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
For the location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle, see
ð
page 272.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan
to install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. If the seat can be moved, you may
need to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle
if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and
the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with
adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head
restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint
and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door
Models With Center Armrest)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
● An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead
to increased head motion and possible injury to
the child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door
Without Center Armrest
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center head
restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door
Models Without Center Armrest)
SAFETY 279
6
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the center tether anchorage located on the back
of the seat.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be ensured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer to
“Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity”
ð
page 148.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE
THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
two to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is removed.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. See
ð
page 252 for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners
so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with
the pedal assemblies or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
280 SAFETY
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
● ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or
turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
● ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
● ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor
mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
● ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with
the vehicle properly parked with the engine off,
fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference.
If your floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
● ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
● NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the floor mat and may cause
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
● If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
● It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU
SHOULD
MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
(Continued)
SAFETY 281
6
● Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
WARNING!
● If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
● If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer
inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent
body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
● Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such
as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
● Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any
abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until
repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
282 SAFETY
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the button a second time
to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
ASSIST And SOS Buttons
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST
and an SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
(Continued)
WARNING!
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
ð
page 371.
● The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
● Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll
be connected to someone who can help. Roadside
Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving and
its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside
assistance.
● SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
7
● Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
● Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to an SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green
once a connection to an SOS operator has been
made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to an SOS operator:
● Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
● The vehicle brand
● The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
● Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator,
the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to determine
if additional help is needed. Once the SOS
operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should
be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will
attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and provide
them with important vehicle information and GPS
coordinates.
WARNING!
● If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable network
and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
● The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS
Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
● Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of
the following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
● The light located within the ASSIST and SOS buttons
will continuously illuminate red.
● The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
● An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
● Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
● The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the system
is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
● The ignition is in the OFF position
● The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
● The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
● The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable
or obstructed
● Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
● Operator error by the SOS operator
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
● Weather
● Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS
signal is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your
provided radio supplement for complete information.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
7
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Scan this QR code to learn more
about Jacking and Tire Changing.
WARNING!
● Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
● Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
● Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
● The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used
to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P), or
a manual transmission into REVERSE (R).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JA
CK LOCATION
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear cargo
area. To remove jack and tools proceed as follows:
1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
Load Floor Handle
NOTE:
The load floor can be removed for easier access
by pulling the load floor handle up and directly
rearward.
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by pinching
the latch on the left side and pulling upward.
Hardware Storage Cover Latch
3. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise to
loosen the jack from the storage bin.
Plastic Wing Nut Location
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove
the tire cover, if equipped.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning the
lock bolt counterclockwise with the #T40 torx head
driver and ratchet from the supplied tool kit.
Unlock Rear Camera Cover
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning
them counterclockwise. If equipped, remove the
locking lug nut with the lock key (located in the
glove box) turning it counterclockwise.
Removing The Spare Tire
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
● Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
● Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an
automatic transmission into PARK; a manual
transmission into REVERSE.
● Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
● Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
● Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
● Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
● Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
● If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
● To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
7
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the
stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the
jack handle driver to the extension, then to the lug
wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
NOTE:
If your vehicle comes with factory equipped 35
inch (88.9 cm) tires, a jack lift block is provided in
the rear cargo area. The jack lift block is used to
provide higher ground clearance when changing a
flat or spare tire. When placing the jack lift block
under the jack, be sure the bottom of the jack fits
securely inside of the raised edges of the block.
Jack Lift Box Usage
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as
shown. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the
vehicle to prevent tool damage.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to change the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts
clockwise.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the
counterclockwise, and remove the jack.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in
a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been
tightened twice
ð
page 362. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.
14. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the spare tire
carrier. Torque down lug nuts and locking lug nut.
15. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on the
camera cover by turning the lock clockwise using
the provided #40 torx head driver and ratchet.
Then, reinstall the camera cover by slipping it over
the camera/tire carrier until it snaps into place.
Lock Bolt Location
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery
in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery
booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly, so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
7
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
For Hybrid Vehicles
The vehicle requires its 12 Volt battery power to turn-
on the vehicle's high voltage battery. The high voltage
battery is used to charge the 12 Volt battery, provide
electric vehicle operation, and to start the vehicle's gas
engine. If the 12 Volt battery has been discharged,
the vehicle can be jump started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack.
If the vehicle's high voltage battery has also been
discharged, it will need to be recharged to a minimum
operating State Of Charge (SOC) before the vehicle can
be started:
● If the vehicle can be connected to a Level 1 or Level
2 charger where it is currently parked, the vehicle
will still require a jump start to allow the vehicle to
begin the battery charging process. Once the vehicle
charging has begun (indicated by the charge status
indicator on top of the vehicle's instrument panel),
the jumper cables can be removed from the vehicle
jump posts.
● If the vehicle cannot be connected to a Level 1 or
Level 2 charger where it is currently parked, the
vehicle can be moved by connecting 12 Volt power
to the vehicle's jump posts and then shifting the
transmission from PARK (P) into NEUTRAL (N). Power
provided by the jumper cables will also allow the
Electric Park Brake to be released. Carefully move
the vehicle to a Level 1 or Level 2 charge location.
While the vehicle is being moved, the external 12
Volt power must remain connected to the vehicle
jump posts.
NOTE:
Be careful when moving the vehicle - ensure that
control of the vehicle is maintained. Also, ensure that
vehicle is secured to prevent unintentional movement
during and after moving the vehicle. If the external
12 Volt power becomes disconnected from the vehicle
jump posts or there is an interruption of the 12
Volt power while moving the vehicle, the vehicle's
transmission may engage PARK. Do not allow the
jumper cables to come in contact with each other or
to the vehicle, this will result in a short.
When the vehicle is at the charging location, shift the
transmission back to PARK, apply the Electric Park
Brake, and start the high voltage battery charging. Once
the vehicle has been secured against unintentional
movement and high voltage battery charging has been
initiated, the jumper cables can be removed from the
vehicle jump posts.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP ST
ART
WARNING!
● Only use the positive battery post on the main
battery to jump start your vehicle. Serious injury
or death could result if you attempt to jump start
using the supplemental battery.
● Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
● Never use a fast battery charger to start the
engine, as this could damage the electronic
systems of your vehicle, particularly the ignition
and engine fuel supply control units.
● If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery.
● Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of
the engine compartment.
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Positive (+) Battery Post
Positive (+) Battery Post (6.4 Engine)
NOTE:
The positive (+) battery post is covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) (manual transmission
in NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over
the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach,
apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
WARNING!
● Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
● Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime
the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
● Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
● Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start system, it
will be equipped with two batteries
ð
page 176
.
Supplemental Battery – If Equipped
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
7
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A “ground”
is an exposed metallic/unpainted part of the
engine, frame or chassis, such as an accessory
bracket or large bolt. The ground must be away
from the battery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
Jump Starting Label
CAUTION!
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other
or either vehicle while making connections.
Failure to follow these procedures could result
in damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive (+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested
at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
● Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
● Strong smell of coolant
● White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
● Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
● On highways — slow down.
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
● In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
● Turn the Air Conditioner (A/C) off. The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
● Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids
in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
(Continued)
WARNING!
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal
when activating the Manual Park Release. Activating
the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to
roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or
by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
See the following steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove
the manual park release cover located in front
of the gear selector, to access the release tether
strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening in the
console base.
Tether Strap
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up until the release lever locks
into place in the vertical position. The vehicle is
now out of PARK (P) and can be moved. Release
the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely
connected to a tow vehicle.
Vertical Released Position
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
7
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from
the “locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward
and to the left, into its original position.
Original Tether Position
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console,
and reinstall the cover.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the release position the
access cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow,
it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear the area
around the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, push and hold the lock button on the
gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE
(D) and REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission)
or SECOND (2) gear and REVERSE (R) (with manual
transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
● For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than two seconds, you must press the
brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
● Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
ð
page 238. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
● Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
(Continued)
CAUTION!
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts to
free a stuck vehicle.
● When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do
not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
● Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described
ð
page 203.
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Towing Con-
dition
Wheels OFF
The Ground
4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
● Automatic Trans-
mission in PARK (P)
● Manual Transmis-
sion in gear (NO
T in
NEUTRAL)
● Transfer Case in
NEUTRAL (N)
● Tow in Forward di-
rection
Wheel Lift
Or Dolly Tow
Front NO
T ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, follow the
instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out
of PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle
ð
page 293.
CAUTION!
● Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
● When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
● If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode, not in the OFF mode.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in
the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK (P) (for automatic
transmissions) or in gear NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual
transmissions)
ð
page 203.
CAUTION!
● Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
● Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF mode. The only approved
method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear fascia/bumpers.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both
of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow
strap.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
7
Front Tow Hooks
Rear Tow Hook
WARNING!
● Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
● Failure to follow proper tow hook usage may cause
components to break resulting in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
● Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Tow straps are
recommended when towing the vehicle, chains
may cause vehicle damage.
● The tow hooks must not be used to move the
vehicle off the road or where there are obstacles.
● Do not use the tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing.
● Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle onto a
flatbed truck.
● Do not use the tow hooks to free a stuck vehicle
ð
page 294.
● Damage to your vehicle may occur if these
guidelines are not followed
ð
page 294.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record
data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed under certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle.
296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This means
that service is required for your vehicle. Operating
conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer towing,
and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
On vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster
display, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed and a
single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped vehicles,
“Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster
odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that
an oil change is necessary.
NOTE:
Hybrid (If Equipped): Even though the vehicle may not
have been driven, both the fuel in the tank and oil
in the engine will still degrade over time. Additionally,
there will be a notification to the driver if the engine is
being run to maintain the oil and fuel systems.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset
by referring to the steps described under Instrument
Cluster Display
ð
page 129.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
● Check the engine oil level.
● Check the windshield washer fluid level.
● Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear.
● Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and fill as
needed.
● Check the function of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE PLAN — 2.0L GAS, HYBRID
AND 3.6L GAS
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required
maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
● Change oil and filter.
● Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
● Inspect 12 Volt battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
8
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
● Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
● Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
● Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
● Inspect exhaust system.
● Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
● Inspect all door latches for presence of grease; reapply if necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, rear suspen-
sion, and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
A
dditional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine.
1
X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.
1
X
1
The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
8
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the engine, intercooler (if equip-
ped), power electronics (if equipped), and battery
(if equipped) coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow
plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation or
more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
X X X X X
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Change front and rear axle fluid if using your vehicle
for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer tow-
ing.
X X X
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
(Continued)
WARNING!
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
● Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
(Continued)
WARNING!
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2.0L HYBRID ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Battery Coolant Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 10 — Intercooler/Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
6 — 12 Volt Battery
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
8
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Battery 7 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
● Crosshatched zone.
● Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
● Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
● Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
● Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
● Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize
spillage onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid
that is spilled onto the top of the engine should
be removed using compressed air or an absorbent
cloth.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and
the rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. The
fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.
Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only
(not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid
reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth
or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize spillage
onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid that is
spilled onto the top of the engine should be removed
using compressed air or an absorbent cloth.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
(Continued)
WARNING!
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
● Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not
lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water
ð
page 289.
● Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
● Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
● Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
8
WARNING!
● Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
● It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached
to the negative post. Battery posts are marked
positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on
the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on
the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
● If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery.
Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting
voltage.
● Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
● If the negative battery cables are not isolated
properly it can cause a potential power spike
or surge in the system, resulting in damage to
essential electrical components.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
CA
UTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform
all service operations in an expert manner. Service
Manuals are available which include detailed service
information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For engine oil selection
ð
page 366.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. We recommend using a Mopar® Engine
Oil Filter. If Mopar® Engine Oil Filters are unavailable,
only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 297.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
can provide a measure of protection in the case
of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure
that no one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters
should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
8
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners
using a suitable tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage may result.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT I
NSPECTION
WARNING!
● Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with the vehicle running.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any time
regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured
by the moving fan blades.
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks
that run across the ribbed surface of the belt, from rib
to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason
to replace a belt. However, cracks running along a
rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks
running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the
belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords, or
severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
● Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
● Rib or belt wear
● Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
● Belt slips
● Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
● Belt broken
● Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use
of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle
serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
● Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring
costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book,
located in your owner’s information kit, for further
warranty information.
(Continued)
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
● The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–
1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-
friendly substance with a low global-warming potential.
The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
compressor oil, and refrigerants. Refer to underhood
label for oil type.
Cabin Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and
lower the door.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the
air filter access door to the HVAC housing.
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
8
5. Remove the cabin air filter(s) from the HVAC air
inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out
of the housing, one at a time.
NOTE:
The cabin air filter may be a one piece design, if
so, using the pleats within the air filter, compress
the filter enough to pull through the opening within
the housing.
Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter
position indicators pointing in the same direction
as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure
retaining tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into
position ensuring you have properly engaged the
travel dampener.
Travel Dampener
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
ð
page
297.
BODY LUBRICA
TION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items
as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers,
liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges,
should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based
grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice
a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
● Wear or uneven edges
● Foreign material
● Hardening or cracking
● Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up
position.
Wiper Blade With Release
Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
push the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the
wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper
arm.
Wiper Blade With Release
Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip
of the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
8
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Open swing gate to access the wiper arm.
Rear Wiper Assembly
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate wiper
blade outward to disengage the wiper blade from
the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
3. Gently set the arm on the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm and rotate the wiper in to
place.
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the tail
gate.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
● Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you
ð
page 280.
● A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
● The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
● Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
(Continued)
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle
serviced promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause
the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs,
stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to
cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
● Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
● Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SY
STEM
WARNING!
● You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
● Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition is
in the ON mode.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler
(if equipped), and Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (if
equipped) coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine, battery (if equipped),
intercooler (if equipped), and MGU (if equipped) coolant
is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if
equipped), and MGU (if equipped) cooling system hoses
for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness
of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT
REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
ð
page
297.
Electric/Battery Coolant System — Hybrid
(If Equipped)
These coolant systems must be serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the coolant level is below what is
specified on the reservoir, contact an authorized dealer
for service.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
8
These systems require the use of high purity water,
such as deionized, or distilled water, when mixing the
water and coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of
lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion
protection in the cooling systems. If the coolant level
of the battery coolant system is low, the Hybrid Electric
Vehicle System Service Light will be illuminated on the
instrument cluster.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information
ð
page 366.
NOTE:
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use
of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact
an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period,
it is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
● We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032.
● Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
● Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
● It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
● Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize
spillage onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid
that is spilled onto the top of the engine should
be removed using compressed air or an absorbent
cloth.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system, please contact
an authorized dealer.
● Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped. The
cap has a small detent on the bottom flange which
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
provides physical and visual feedback that the cap is
fully tightened. Do not over-tighten.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
● Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
● Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) OAT
or HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine
the disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene
glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground, clean up any
ground spills immediately. If ingested, seek emergency
assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure
cap unless checking for engine coolant freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of
this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
WARNING!
● Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
● Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be within the OK range between the
ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine
coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle
without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the
coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure
cap unless checking for engine coolant freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of
this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or
high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
8
● Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
● Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
● If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
● Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
● Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
● Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
● Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 297.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master
Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add
fluid to bring level within the designated marks on
the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can
be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. If
the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
leaks
ð
page 367.
WARNING!
● Use only the manufacturer recommended brake
fluid
ð
page 367. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
● Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
● Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FL
UID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm)
below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
3
16 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by
the axles.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer recommended fluid
ð
page
367.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole when the vehicle is in a level position.
Transfer Case
1 — Fill hole
2 — Drain hole
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 297.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid
ð
page 367.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and
a point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below
the bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise,
change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance
Plan. Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals
ð
page 297.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended manual
transmission fluid
ð
page 367.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any special
additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perform-
ance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
8
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer specified transmission
fluid
ð
page 367. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder
ð
page 367.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
● When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. The use of
a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload.
If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected. Never replace a blown fuse with metal
wires or any other material. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
● Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
● If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
● If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Centers (PDC) are located in
the engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The
PDC top cover is labeled with each serviceable fuse/
relay location, function, and size.
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center
and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
Power Distribution Center Location
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
8
Gasoline Engine Fuses
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare *
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR / FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare *
F07 – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump *
F08 – 15 Amp Blue TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare *
F10 – 15 Amp Blue ESCL
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare *
F14 – – Spare *
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F15 – 15 Amp Blue IPC / Switch Bank-HD Elec
F16 – – Spare *
F17 – – Spare *
F18 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch
F19 – – Spare *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER
F22 – 10 Amp Red ECM / ETC
F23 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F24 30 Amp Pink – Pass Pwr Seat
F25 – 10 Amp Red MOD_SBW
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red HVAC CTRL MOD / SCL / OCM / DPDM
F33 – 10 Amp Red PTS / IRCM / Airbag Disable Lamps
F34 – 10 Amp Red ESC / EHPS / SBCM Wake Up
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP *
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW ELEC BRK MOD *
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W *
F38 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F39 – – Spare *
F40 – 15 Amp Blue DTCM / Axle Lock FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue IC / SGW Wake Up
F42 – 10 Amp Red PCR Ctrl Feed (ESS) *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM HEATERS
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN *
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD / LVL MTR / HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare *
F48 – – Spare *
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC *
F51 – 10 Amp Red Digital TV Inline / USB / ISRVM / Compass Mod
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – – Spare *
F54 – – Spare *
F55 – 10 Amp Red Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM)
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR Temp Sesr / AID
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Driver Heated Seats
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Pass Heated Seats
F59 30 Amp Pink – Driver Pwr Seat
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F60 – 15 Amp Blue CSWM (Htd Str Wheel)
F61 – 15 Amp Blue LBSS / RBSS / CADM-LO *
F62 – 10 Amp Red Exhaust Sol *
F63 – – Spare
F64 – – Spare *
F65 – – Spare *
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Mtr Front
F67 – – Spare *
F68 – – Spare *
F69 – 10 Amp Red KIN / RF Hub
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ / IGN COIL
F71 – – Spare *
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG *
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F75 – – Spare *
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F77 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F78 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion Mod / SIREN / Intrusion Snsrs
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow Smart Bar Ctrl Mod
F80 – 15 Amp Blue SOL 1,2 BLOCK SHIFT *
F81 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost (EBL)
F82 – – Spare *
F83 – – Spare *
F84 – – Spare *
F85 – – Spare *
F86 – – Spare *
F87 – – Spare *
F88 – – Spare *
F89 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise Ctl / DTV / EVIC / Airbag Disable Lamp
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F90 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Park Lmp *
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2*
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1*
F94 – 10 Amp Red Dual USB Port
F95 – – Spare *
F96 – 10 Amp Red Pwr Mirror SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC / OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare *
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & Valves
F101 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F102 – 15 Amp Blue TBM2 / DCSD Mod
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 *
F104 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar SW (Driver & Pass)
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F105 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC / ETC
F106 50 Amp Red – ESC -Pump Mtr
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Stop/Turn LT *
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 *
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Stop/Turn RT *
F110 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F111 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup *
Hybrid Fuses
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – 5 Amp Tan HV Electric Coolant Heater Enable
F02 – – Spare*
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR / FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F06 – 15 Amp Blue BPCM
F07 – 15 Amp Blue PECP-2 (LTR COOLANT PUMP)
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – 5 Amp Tan IDCM
F10 – 15 Amp Blue ESCL
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – 10 Amp Red PIM - Redundant Main Pwr Supply
F14 – 10 Amp Red PIM - Main Pwr Supply
F15 – 15 Amp Blue IPC / Switch Bank-HD ELEC
F16 – – Spare*
F17 40 Amp Green – Trans Oil Pump
F18 – 10 Amp Red Electric Air Conditioning Compressor
F19 – 5 Amp Tan Charge Port Indicator
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – CBC 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper *
F22 – 10 Amp Red ECM / PIM / ETC
F23 – – Spare*
F24 30 Amp Pink – Pass Power Seat
F25 – 10 Amp Red MOD_SBW
F26 40 Amp Green – CBC 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – CBC 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – CBC 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red
HVAC CTRL MOD / Steering Column Lock (SCL) / Occupant Classifi-
cation Module (OCM) / Driver Presence Detection Module (DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red PTS / IRCM MODULE
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) / Electric Hydraulic Power Steering
(EHPS) / Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 – – Spare*
F36 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake Mod
F37 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Conn 7W
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
F39 – – Spare*
F40 – 15 Amp Blue DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM) / Axle Lock FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC) / Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – – Spare*
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN*
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD / LVL MTR / HDLP SW
F47 – 10 Amp Red QVPM - Quiet Vehicle Pedestrian Module
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F48 – 10 Amp Red Spare*
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC
F51 – 10 Amp Red DTV / USB / ISRVM / Compass Mod / Inverter 400W */ ECM / PIM
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Speaker *
F54 – – Spare *
F55 – 10 Amp Red CVPM
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Driver Heated Seats
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Pass Heated Seats
F59 30 Amp Pink – Driver Power Seat
F60 – 15 Amp Blue HTD STR WHEEL
F61 – 15 Amp Blue LBSS / RBSS / CADM-LO *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F62 – – Spare *
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare *
F65 50 Amp Red – Power Inverter 400W
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Mtr Front
F67 – 15 Amp Blue BCP - Lo Temp Active Pump
F68 – – Spare*
F69 – 10 Amp Red KIN / RF Hub
F70 – 25 Amp Clear IGN COIL / FUEL INJECTOR
F71 – 10 Amp Red Battery Coolant Heater
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT *
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT *
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Charge Indicator / Sw Bank Hybrid Mode
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F77 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F78 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion Mod / Siren / Intrusion Sensors *
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow Smart Bar CTRL Mod
F80 – 15 Amp Blue SOL 1 2 Block Shift / Mod ELCM / SOL Fuel Tank Isolation
F81 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F82 – – Spare*
F83 50 Amp Red – ESC-ECU & Valves
F84 20 Amp Blue – PIM - High Side Drive Power
F85 – 15 Amp Blue PECP - Lo Temp Passive Pump
F86 – – Spare *
F87 – 15 Amp Blue AHP - Hi Temp Aux Pump
F88 – – Spare *
F89 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / CRUISE CTL / EVIC / DTV / AIRBAG DISABLE LMP
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1
F94 – 10 Amp Red Dual USB Port
F95 – – Spare *
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC / OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare*
F100 – – Spare*
F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue TBM2 / DCSD Mod
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F104 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar SW (Drive & Pass)
F105 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC / ETC
F106 50 Amp Red – Electronic Speed Control (ESC)-PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP / TURN LT
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP / TURN RT
F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER 150W
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP
Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed when the ignition in ON.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission
Indicator Lamp
658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rocker Switch Indicator
Lamp (Rear Window De-
fogger, and Rear Wash/
Wipe)
**
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
8
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section
includes bulb description and replacement part
numbers.
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED
Sport Front Park/Turn
Signal Lamps (2)
7444NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn
Signal Lamps (2)
LED
Base (Sahara/Rubicon)
Turn Lamp
7440NALL/WY21WLL
Base (Sahara/Rubicon)
Park DRL Lamp
7443LL
Front Side Marker Lamps
(2)
LED
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Premium LED Tail
Lamps
LED
Rear Base Tail Lamp
Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb
3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp
Backup Bulb
7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side
Marker
LED
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
LED
License Lamp LED
NO
TE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be
purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs
to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to
the applicable Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Remove the retainers
along the top of the grille and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one
side and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three fasteners holding the headlamp
to the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grab the bulb and rotate a quarter turn
counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a quarter
turn clockwise.
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
bulb sockets.
Wheel Liner
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove from housing. Pull
the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
LED FRONT SIDE MARKER
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
side maker screw and electrical connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the front
side maker assembly and disconnect electrical
connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light
assembly.
HALOGEN FRONT FOG LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the
front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the
front fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grab the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the
housing and then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are
replaced as an assembly.
REAR TAIL, STOP, TURN SIGNAL, AND BACKUP
LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access single
retaining screw for tail lamp assembly.
Trim Cap
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect electrical
connector, then remove tail lamp assembly from
the vehicle.
NOTE:
If necessary, push in on the assembly tab located
inboard behind the lamp housing.
3. Remove the three screws from assembly bracket
to access bulb sockets.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
8
4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter turn
counterclockwise, then remove it from the housing.
Bulb Removal
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP
(CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
upward from the swing gate behind the spare tire. If
service is needed, obtain the LED Assembly from an
authorized dealer.
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier cover.
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly and
disconnect electrical connector.
LICENSE PLATE LAMPS
See an authorized dealer to replace LED lamps.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE:
● P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
● European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
● LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for LT-
Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
● Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFET
Y INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification
Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire
Pressures, and Tire Loading.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with bead-lock wheels,
please refer to your vehicles bead-lock specific part
number for additional information and instructions on
mopar.com or by contacting an authorized dealer.
● High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
● Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
● "R" means radial construction, or
● "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
8
EXAMPLE:
95 = Load Index
● A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
● A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
● The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
● XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
● LL
= Light load tire or
● C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Service Description:
EXAMPLE:
DOT = Department of Transportation
● This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD
= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 01 means the year 2001
● Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
8
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity
if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and
cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And
Loading Information Placard
ð
page 198.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
ð
page 198.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step
4.
NOTE:
● If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The
following table shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
● For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lb
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
● Safety
● Fuel Economy
● Tread Wear
● Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
● Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
(Continued)
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
● Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
● Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
● Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
● Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
● Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift
to the right or left.
● Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
● Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
● Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
● Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
● Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this
in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and
the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold
tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21
kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C)
for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation
pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer
or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
8
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
● The tire has not been driven on when flat.
● The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
● The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6
mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it
is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs
when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in
a Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
For further information
ð
page 294.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced.
For further information
ð
page 347.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
● Driving style.
● Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
● Distance driven.
● Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
using tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality
and performance when replacement is needed. Refer
to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this
section. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
ð
page 339.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
● Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
● Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
8
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow
or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires,
be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75
mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120
km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
ð
page
201.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in
the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has
this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with
the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on
the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the
driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like
the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed
on your Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall
it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar®
Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
8
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
(Continued)
CAUTION!
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION
DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following
snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
● Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
● No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
● Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
Gasoline Engines
T
rim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Sport
Rear
245/75R17 S Class or Autosock
LT285/75R17C
LT315/70R17C
Autosock
Sahara 255/70R18
Rubicon
LT255/75R17C
LT285/70R17C
LT315/70R17C
Rubicon 392 LT315/70R17C
Summit 275/55R20
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Hybrid Engine
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Sport
Rear
275/55R20
LT285/70R17C
Autosock
Sahara
255/70R18
275/55R20
Summit 275/55R20
Rubicon
LT255/75R17C
LT285/70R17C
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
● Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
(Continued)
CAUTION!
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
● Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8
km). Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
● Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
● Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
● Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use. Always
use the suggested operating speed of the device
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48
km/h).
● Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
TIRE RO
TATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
8
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off
Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help
to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 297.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire
size can cause damage to the transfer case. Tire
rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire
wear.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned
by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of
the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate
of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime
the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
● Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
● Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
● Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated
properly it can cause a potential power spike or
surge in the system, resulting in damage to essential
electrical components.
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
● Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
● If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start system
then disconnect both the main and supplemental
negative battery cables.
● Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
● If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery
system, see an authorized dealer.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
8
Battery Cable Disconnect
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
4 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
NOTE:
● You must isolate the supplemental battery
connection point, as well as the main battery
terminal from the post, as shown in the image,
to fully de-energize both batteries for storage. If
assistance is needed to disconnect the battery
system, see an authorized dealer.
● Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS), or your Stop/Start system may not function for
up to 24 hours, due to the IBS being set into learn
mode.
STORING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID (IF
EQUIPPED)
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
● Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location with the windows open slightly.
● Check that the parking brake is not engaged.
● Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.
NOTE:
Disconnecting the 12 Volt battery will prevent the
High Voltage (HV) battery from accepting a charge
from the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE).
Also, the vehicle will not condition the HV battery
(if needed and connected to a powered EVSE). If
the HV battery is not able to condition itself and it
becomes cold enough (or hot enough), the vehicle
will not start until the HV battery’s cell temperatures
are between -22°F (-30°C) and 122°F (50°C).
● If you do not disconnect the battery from the
electrical system, check the battery charge every 30
days.
● Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the vehicle for approximately
five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and
high fan speed. This will ensure proper lubrication
of the system, thus minimizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put
back into operation.
● Plug in the vehicle when not using it whenever
possible.
NOTE:
The hybrid has a feature of periodic wake-up that
occurs every three weeks. This feature charges the 12
Volt battery from the HV battery. This will happen as
long as the HV battery remains above the minimum
state of charge
ð
page 153.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s
door. When reconnecting the positive and negative
terminals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is
in the OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FR
OM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other
seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your
vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and
other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The most common causes are:
● Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
● Stone and gravel impact.
● Insects, tree sap and tar.
● Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
● Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and
fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
● Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely
with water.
● If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
● Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
● Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
● Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
● Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
● If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
● It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
● If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
● If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
● If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
● If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
● Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's interior
trim and top, follow these precautions:
● Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
result.
● Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage
interior trim.
● Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on
top material, as damage may result.
● Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry
on the paint, leaving a streak.
● After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
8
● Be especially careful when washing the windows
by following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top
Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar® Car Wash or equivalent, or
mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with
soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use Mopar®
Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild
foaming cleaner on the entire top, but support the top
from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember
to allow the top to dry before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains, or mildew of the top material:
● Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
result.
● It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet may
allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
● Use care when washing the vehicle, water
pressure directed at the weather strip seals may
cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
● Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
● The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
● Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes in
washing stations. Wash the vehicle only by
hand using neutral pH detergents; dry it with a
wet chamois leather. Abrasive products and/or
polishes should not be used for cleaning the car.
● Bird droppings must be washed off immediately
and thoroughly as the acid they contain is
particularly aggressive.
● Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle under
trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as,
when dried, it may only be possible to remove
them with abrasive products and/or polishes,
which is highly inadvisable as they could alter the
typical opaqueness of the paint.
● Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for
cleaning the front windshield and rear window;
dilute it to a minimum of 50% water. Only use pure
windshield washer fluid when strictly necessary
due to outside temperature conditions.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic windows
which can be scratched unless special care is taken by
following these directions:
● Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use
a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened
with cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across
the window, not up and down. Mopar® Jeep® Soft
Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean
all plastic windows without scratching. It removes
fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV
protection to help prevent yellowing.
● When washing, never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such
as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
● Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
● When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a
scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if
you must clean the window quickly.
● Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have an impact on plastic retainer
operation. Even normal on-road driving and vehicle
washing will eventually impact window plastic
retainer operation. To maintain ease of use of
the window plastic retainers, each window plastic
retainer should be cleaned and lubricated regularly.
Clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through an
authorized dealer.
● Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to
the windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the windows.
INTERIORS
CARPET SAFETY INFORMATION
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use carpet that does not interfere with the operation
of the pedal assemblies. Only operate the vehicle when
the carpet is securely attached by the grommets so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedal
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
assemblies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
WARNING!
● If operating the vehicle without carpet in place the
floor may become hot, and there is a risk of burns.
● An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
damaged grommets may cause your carpet to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS
securely attach your carpet using the grommets.
● ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
● NEVER place any objects under the carpet (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the carpet and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
● ONLY install carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install carpet that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If the carpet
needs to be replaced, only use manufacturer
approved carpet for the specific make, model, and
year of your vehicle.
● If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check that the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
CARPET REMOVAL
Front Carpe
ts (Two And Four Door Models):
1. Remove the front grommets.
Front Carpet
1 — Grommets
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
Front Carpet Pulled Away
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First
for the rear carpet and then the front carpet.
Front And Rear Carpet Split
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet
split and then pull out the rear edge and slide the
carpet to the front (do not remove the harness).
Rear Underside Of Front Seat Carpet Split
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
8
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket
and then remove the last two grommets.
Front Seat And Floor
1 — Grommets
6. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the carpet
is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and
refasten grommets.
Rear Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one
left and one right).
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the
carpet split around the front seats brackets.
Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one
left and one right). First the grommet for the cargo
carpet and then the rear carpet.
4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet
split around the rear seats brackets.
Under Rear Seat
1 — Carpet Split
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the carpet
is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and
refasten grommets.
Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the rear seats.
2. Remove the sides grommets (one left and one
right). First the grommet from the side carpet and
then the rear carpet.
Side Carpet
1 — Grommet
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one
left and one right).
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and open the
carpet split around the front seats brackets.
Pull Carpet To The Rear
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the carpet
is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and
refasten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one
left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the carpet
split around the seat belt attachment.
Under Rear Seat
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and the
side support and then pull the carpet out.
Rear Load Floor
1 — Side Support
2 — Load Floor
3 — Side Support
4. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the carpet
is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and
refasten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap Hider:
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one
left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet
split around the seat belt attachment and under
the center seat bracket.
Under Rear Seat
1 — Grommets
2 — Carpet Split
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the carpet
is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and
refasten grommets.
Side Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet (one left and one right).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
8
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then
all around the perimeter and open the carpet split
around the seat belt attachment.
Inside Sidewall
1 — Top Flange
2 — Grommet
3 — Side Carpet
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the carpet
is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and
refasten grommets.
Side Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet and then the lower one
(left and right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then
all around the perimeter and open the carpet split
around the seat belt attachment.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the carpet
is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and
refasten grommets.
SEATS AND FABRIC PAR
TS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or
if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
● Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior
may cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
● Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles
of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar® total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the A-
pillar, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of overall
braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal
travel during application, greater pedal force required
to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required
to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on
the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using
a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb (176
N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Spare Tire Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
59 ft-lb (80
N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Spare tire torque is for the spare tire, located on the
swing gate.
Wheel Mounting Surface
362 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see
a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
number lower than recommended can cause engine
failure and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and performance,
when using high-quality unleaded regular
gasoline having an octane rating of 87, as specified
by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
premium gasoline will allow these engines to operate
to optimal performance. This increase in performance
is most noticeable in hot weather or under heavy load
conditions such as while towing.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet
all emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded regular
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as specified
by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
premium gasoline will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are recommended.
Using gasolines that have these additives will help
improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain
vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When available, the usage
of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active
solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel
system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 363
9
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed the
applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump
labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
● Operate in a lean mode
● OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
● Poor engine performance
● Poor cold start and cold drivability
● Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP)
may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and
fuel system components. Problems that result from
running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane
number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT
reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in
your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should
ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SY
STEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
● The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
● An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
● The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products contain
high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives
is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
364 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
4Xe Models 17.2 gal 65 L
Two Door Models 17.5 gal 66 L
Four Door Models 21.5 gal 81 L
Engine Oil with Filt
er
2.0L Engine 5 qt 4.73 L
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.73 L
Cooling System
2.0L Engine (Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.) 12 qt 11.4 L
2.0L Engine Intercooler 3.7 qt 3.5 L
2.0L Hybrid Battery Coolant (Contact an authorized dealer for service) 5.6 qt 5.3 L
2.0L Hybrid Power Electronics Coolant (Contact an authorized dealer for service) 5.7 qt 5.4 L
3.6L Engine (Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.) 13.4 qt 12.7 L
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) 2.3 qt 2.2 L
3.6L Power Pack Unit (PPU) Coolant 3.3 qt 3.1 L
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 365
9
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Intercooler
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Battery, and Power Electric Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic
Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine oil can be used but must
have the API Donut trademark
ð
page 306.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause engine
damage not covered b
y the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full
synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trade-
mark
ð
page 306.
366 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with
the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your trans-
mission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Differential We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 367
9
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Rear Axle Differential (M200 Sales Code DRZ) We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140)(API GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)
We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5). Models
equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
368 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are interested
in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer for non-warranty service as well.
FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and
in a timely manner.
If your authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact an FCA US LLC Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to an FCA US LLC Customer
Assistance center should include the following
information:
● Owner's name and address
● Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
● Authorized dealer name
● Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
● Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUS
TOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA C
USTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
MEXICO
Customer Relations Office
STELLANTIS Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
Customer Service
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Available: 24 Hours, 7 Days A Week
Your vehicle’s VIN is required to receive covered
services.
● Flat Tire Service
● Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery - This service is limited to
two occurrences in a 12-month period. Up to two
gallons of fuel will be provided by a service
provider.
● 12V Battery Jump Assistance
● Lockout Service
● Towing Service
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 369
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
O
R SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
centers. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties who require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY users, dial 711. For
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by
FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond
your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar®
Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within
three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased
additional coverage with an extended service contract.
FCA Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service
contracts. Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine
Canada Inc. service contract. We are not responsible
for other companies’ contracts. If you purchased a
contract other than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service
contract and you have a problem, you will have to
contact the administrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable
protection against repair costs after your vehicle
warranties have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection
plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans
authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC
to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle's
warranty.
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
To access your warranty informa-
tion online, visit www.mopar.com/om
(US) or www.owners.mopar.ca/en
or
www.owners.mopar.ca/fr (Canada).
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components and is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly
how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
370 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Owner's Manuals
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca/en
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
● Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
● Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
● Exact Odometer Reading
● First and Last Name
● Phone Number
● Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
● Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
G
ENERAL INF
ORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 371
10
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ...........................................362
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) ....................................................180, 181
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ................ 314
Adding Fuel ............................................. 194, 195
Additives, Fuel ..................................................363
Adventure Guides ............................................ 233
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ....................................... 260
Air Bag Warning Light ........................258, 260
Enhanced Accident Response ..........
267, 296
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ....................... 296
Front Air Bag ...................................... 258, 260
If Deployment Occurs .................................267
Knee Impact Bolsters .................................264
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 268
Maintenance ...............................................268
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 258
Transporting Pets ....................................... 280
Air Bag Light ...................................139, 258, 280
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ................................................................ 307
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..........................308
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................... 308, 309
Air Conditioner System ....................................308
Air Conditioning Filter ............................... 82, 309
Air Conditioning System .................................... 81
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................... 82
Air Filter ............................................................ 307
Air Pressure
Tires .............................................................345
Alarm
Arm The System ............................................45
Disarm The System .......................................45
Rearm The System ....................................... 45
Security Alarm ......................................45, 142
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle ...........................................................
10
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 236
Anti-Lock Warning Light .................................. 142
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................... 314, 365
Disposal .......................................................315
Assist, Hill Start ............................................... 240
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................... 211
Auto Down Power Windows ...............................88
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................................ 70
Automatic Door Locks ....................................... 48
Automatic Headlights .........................................76
Automatic High Beams ...................................... 76
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...............81
Automatic Transmission ..................................158
Adding Fluid ................................................ 318
Fluid And Filter Change .............................. 318
Fluid Change ............................................... 318
Fluid Level Check ........................................317
Fluid Type ........................................... 318, 367
Gear Ranges ............................................... 159
Special Additives .........................................317
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 160
AutoPark ...........................................................151
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 85
Auxiliary Power Outlet ........................................85
Auxiliary Switches .............................................. 86
Axle Fluid ..........................................................367
Axle Lock ................................................. 165, 166
B
B-Pillar Location .............................................. 342
Battery .............................................. 15, 140, 305
Charging ........................................................ 22
Charging System Light ............................... 140
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .....................36
Belts, Seat ........................................................280
Blind Spot Monitoring ......................................243
Body Mechanism Lubrication ......................... 310
Brake Assist System ........................................ 237
Brake Control System ......................................237
Brake Fluid .....................................316, 366, 367
372
Brake System ..........................................316, 362
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................................... 362
Fluid Check ................................................. 316
Master Cylinder ...........................................316
Parking ........................................................ 154
Warning Light ..............................................140
Brake/Transmission Interlock ........................ 158
Bulb Replacement ..................................335, 336
Bulbs, Light ............................................. 281, 335
Bumper End Cap Removal ..............................205
C
Camera, Rear ...................................................192
Capacities, Fluid .............................................. 365
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..............................................................194
Oil (Engine) ..................................................302
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .......................314
Car Washes ......................................................355
Carbon Monoxide Warning .....................281, 282
Cargo Load Floor ............................................. 123
Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................123
Carpeting ..........................................................357
Cellular Phone ................................................. 230
Center High Mounted Stop Light .................... 338
Certification Label ........................................... 198
Chains, Tire ......................................................350
Charging ............................................................. 22
Chart, Tire Sizing ............................................. 339
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ................................................................ 149
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................... 280
Checks, Safety ................................................. 280
Child Restraint .................................................269
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................................. 270
Child Seat Installation ................................ 278
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 275
Infant And Child Restraints ........................ 270
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ................274
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 272
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........270
Seating Positions ........................................ 271
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................... 363
Cleaning
Wheels ........................................................ 349
Climate Control
Automatic ...................................................... 79
Cold Weather Operation ..................................153
Compact Spare Tire .........................................348
Connector
UCI ................................................................. 84
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ............ 84
Console ...............................................................83
Floor ...............................................................83
Contract, Service ............................................. 370
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .............314
Cooling System ................................................ 313
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................... 314
Coolant Level .............................................. 315
Cooling Capacity ......................................... 365
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................... 315
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...............................313
Inspection ...........................................313, 315
Points To Remember ..................................
315
Pressure Cap ...............................................314
Radiator Cap ............................................... 314
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....314, 365,
366
Corrosion Protection ........................................354
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .............. 180, 181
Cruise Light ............................................. 146,
148
Customer Assistance ...................................... 369
Customer Programmable Features ................ 211
Cybersecurity ................................................... 211
D
Daytime Running Lights .................................... 75
De-Icer
Remote Start .................................................42
Dealer Service ................................................. 306
Defroster, Windshield ......................................280
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ............................... 78
Diagnostic System, Onboard .......................... 148
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ....................................................... 77
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................................................305
Disable Vehicle Towing ....................................294
373
11
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ....................... 315
Door Ajar ................................................. 140, 142
Door Ajar Light ........................................ 140,
142
Door Frame ...................................................... 116
Installation .................................................. 116
Removal ...................................................... 116
Door Locks
Automatic ...................................................... 48
Door Off Mirror Kit ............................................. 53
Doors .................................................................. 46
Removal ..................................................49, 52
Removal, Front ..............................................
49
Removal, Rear ...............................................52
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .................................61, 62
Driving .............................................................. 205
Dual Mode Exhaust ......................................... 168
E
Electric Brake Control System ........................ 237
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................. 236
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................. 238, 242
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ......... 85
Electrical Power Outlets .................................... 85
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ....................238
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .......141
Emergency
In Case Of ................................................... 283
SOS Emergency Call ...................................283
Emergency Brake ............................................ 154
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking ........................................................ 286
Jump Starting ............................................. 289
Tow Hooks ...................................................295
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 149
Engine .............................................................. 302
Air Cleaner ...................................................307
Break-In Recommendations ...................... 154
Checking Oil Level ...................................... 305
Compartment .................................... 302–304
Compartment Identification ............. 302–304
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................366
Cooling .........................................................313
Exhaust Gas Caution .........................281, 282
Fails To Start ...............................................
152
Flooded, Starting ........................................ 152
Fuel Requirements ............................363, 365
Jump Starting ............................................. 289
Oil .............................................. 306, 365, 366
Oil Filler Cap ................................................302
Oil Filter ....................................................... 307
Oil Reset ......................................................131
Oil Selection .......................................306, 365
Oil Synthetic ................................................306
Overheating ................................................ 292
Starting .............................................. 150, 153
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .267, 296
Ethanol .............................................................363
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................................... 281
Exhaust Gas Cautions .....................................282
Exhaust System ...................................... 281, 312
Exterior Lights ........................................... 75,
281
F
Fabric Care .......................................................355
Fabric Top .........................................................355
Filters
Air Cleaner ...................................................307
Air Conditioning ....................................82, 309
Engine Oil .................................................... 307
Engine Oil Disposal .....................................307
Flash-To-Pass ......................................................
76
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................................... 283
Turn Signal .................................................. 281
Turn Signals ........................................147, 337
Flat Tire Changing .................................. 338, 348
Flat Tire Stowage ....................................338, 348
Flooded Engine Starting ................................. 152
Fluid Capacities ............................................... 365
Fluid Leaks .......................................................281
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission ................................. 317
Fluid Level Checks ...........................................316
Brake ........................................................... 316
Engine Oil ....................................................305
Fluid, Brake ......................................................367
Fog Lights .................................................. 76, 337
Fog Lights, Service .......................................... 337
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat ...............................65
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................... 61
Folding Rear Seats ............................................ 63
Folding Windshield .......................................... 119
374
Disposal
Forward Collision Warning .............................. 246
Four Wheel Drive ............................................. 161
Operation .................................................... 161
Shifting ........................................................ 161
System .........................................................161
Four Wheel Drive Operation ............................163
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ................................ 283
Freedom Panels ...............................................108
Front Axle (Differential) ....................................316
Fuel ...................................................................363
Adding ................................................ 194, 195
Additives ......................................................
363
Clean Air ......................................................363
Ethanol ........................................................363
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................................194
Gasoline ...................................................... 363
Materials Added ......................................... 363
Methanol .....................................................363
Octane Rating ....................................363, 366
Requirements ............................................. 365
Specifications ............................................. 366
Tank Capacity ............................................. 365
Fueling .....................................................194, 195
Fuses ................................................................ 318
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..................... 72
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............194, 195, 197
Gasoline, (Fuel) ................................................363
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................... 363
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................. 363
Gear Ranges ........................................... 156, 159
Glass Cleaning .................................................361
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...........................
199
GVWR ............................................................... 198
H
Hard Top ............................................................. 89
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................283
Head Restraints ................................................. 67
Headlights
Automatic ...................................................... 76
Bulb Replacement ......................................336
Cleaning ...................................................... 355
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .......... 76
Lights On Reminder ...................................... 76
Passing .......................................................... 76
Replacing .................................................... 336
Heated Mirrors ................................................... 71
Heated Seats ..................................................... 67
Heated Steering Wheel ..................................... 60
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ................................................................. 76
High Voltage Battery .......................................... 15
Hill Start Assist ................................................ 240
Hitches .
Trailer Towing .............................................. 200
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................... 72
Hood Prop ........................................................ 121
Hood Release .................................................. 121
I
Ignition ................................................................38
Keyless Ignition PHEV ...................................39
Switch ............................................................ 38
In Case Of Emergency .....................................283
Inside Rearview Mirror ...................................... 70
Instrument Cluster ................................. 125, 129
Descriptions ................................................ 147
Display .........................................................129
Engine Oil Reset ......................................... 131
Menu Items .................................................134
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................... 360
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ...................318
Interior And Instrument Lights .......................... 77
Interior Appearance Care ................................356
Interior Lights ..................................................... 77
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .................. 78
Inverter
Power .............................................................86
J
Jack Location ...................................................286
Jack Operation .................................................287
Jacking Instructions .........................................287
Jump Starting .................................................. 289
375
11
K
Key Fob
Arm The System ............................................45
Disarm The System .......................................45
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............
37
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................................................. 36
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) 37
Keyless Enter'n Go™ ..........................................46
Passive Entry .................................................46
Keys .................................................................... 35
Replacement .................................................37
L
Lane Change Assist ........................................... 77
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................... 253
Latches .............................................................
281
Hood ................................................... 121,
141
Leaks, Fluid ......................................................281
Life Of Tires ...................................................... 347
Light Bulbs .............................................. 281, 335
Lighted Cupholders ........................................... 84
Lights ................................................................281
Air Bag .......................................139, 258, 280
Automatic Headlights ....................................
76
Brake Assist Warning ................................. 239
Brake Warning ............................................ 140
Bulb Replacement .............................335, 336
Center Mounted Stop .................................338
Courtesy/Reading .........................................
77
Cruise ................................................. 146, 148
Daytime Running .......................................... 75
Dimmer Switch ..............................................77
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............................77
Drowsiness Detected ..................................147
Electric Power Steering .............................. 140
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ............................................. 141, 143
Exterior ................................................. 75, 281
Fog .........................................................76, 337
Fuel Filler Cap ............................................. 143
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................283
Headlights ...................................................336
High Beam .....................................................76
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...................... 76
Interior ........................................................... 77
Lights On Reminder ...................................... 76
Low Fuel ...................................................... 143
Low Washer Fluid ....................................... 143
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......143
Oil Temperature .......................................... 141
Park ............................................................. 146
Passing .......................................................... 76
Rear Servicing .............................................337
Rear Tail Lamps .......................................... 337
Seat Belt Reminder .................................... 142
Security Alarm .............................................142
Service ............................................... 335, 336
Side Marker .................................................337
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...............248
Traction Control .......................................... 239
Transmission Temperature ........................ 142
Turn Signal .................................................. 281
Turn Signals ........................................147, 337
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ....................................... 141, 147
Load Floor, Cargo ............................................ 123
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ......................138
Load Shed Battery Saver On ...........................138
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............ 138
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 138
Loading Vehicle ............................................... 198
Tires .............................................................342
Locking
Axle ..................................................... 165, 166
Locks
Automatic Door ............................................. 48
Child Protection .............................................48
Power Door ....................................................46
Low Tire Pressure System ...............................248
Lubrication, Body .............................................310
Lug Nuts/Bolts .................................................362
Luggage Carrier ............................................... 124
M
Maintenance ....................................................113
Maintenance Free Battery .............................. 305
Maintenance Schedule ................................... 297
376
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) .................................................... 143, 149
Manual
Park Release ...............................................293
Service ........................................................ 370
Manual Transmission ............................. 155, 317
Fluid Level Check ........................................
317
Lubricant Selection ............................317, 367
Shift Speeds ............................................... 156
Methanol ..........................................................363
Mirrors ................................................................ 70
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 70
Heated ........................................................... 71
Outside .......................................................... 71
Rearview ........................................................70
Vanity ............................................................. 70
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ........................................................... 10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........................248
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...........................154
O
Occupant Restraints ........................................252
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............363, 366
Off Road Pages ................................................231
Accessory Gauges ...................................... 231
Drivetrain .....................................................231
Pitch And Roll ..............................................231
Status Bar ................................................... 231
Oil Filter, Change ..............................................307
Oil Filter, Selection ...........................................307
Oil Pressure Light .............................................141
Oil Reset ...........................................................131
Oil, Engine ...............................................306, 366
Capacity ...................................................... 365
Checking ..................................................... 305
Dipstick ....................................................... 305
Disposal ...................................................... 307
Filter .............................................................307
Filter Disposal ............................................. 307
Identification Logo ......................................306
Materials Added To .....................................306
Pressure Warning Light .............................. 141
Recommendation ..............................306, 365
Synthetic ..................................................... 306
Viscosity ...................................................... 365
Onboard Diagnostic System ........................... 148
Operating Precautions .................................... 148
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ..........................................370
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................. 71
Overheating, Engine ........................................292
P
Paddle Shifters ................................................ 160
Paint Care ........................................................ 354
Panic Alarm ........................................................ 36
Parking Brake .................................................. 154
ParkSense System, Rear ................................ 188
Passive Entry ......................................................46
Pedestrian Warning System ............................236
Pets .................................................................. 280
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........342
Power
Brakes .........................................................362
Door Locks .................................................... 46
Inverter .......................................................... 86
Mirrors ........................................................... 71
Seats ..............................................................61
Steering ....................................................... 175
Windows ........................................................ 88
Power Sliding Top ............................................ 113
Operation .................................................... 113
Pinch Protect ...............................................113
Quarter Window Removal .......................... 115
Power Steering Fluid ....................................... 367
Power Top Quarter Windows ...........................115
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................... 256
Preparation For Jacking .................................. 286
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ....................................................256
Profile Settings .................................................214
R
Radial Ply Tires ................................................ 346
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 314
377
11
Radio Operation .............................................. 230
Radio Remote Controls ................................... 230
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................... 316
Rear Camera ....................................................192
Rear Cross Path ............................................... 245
Rear ParkSense System ................................. 188
Rear Seat Reminder Alert ............................... 237
Rear Swing Gate ..............................................122
Rear Wiper/Washer ...........................................79
Recreational Towing ........................................ 203
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 204
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .204
Reformulated Gasoline ................................... 363
Refrigerant .......................................................309
Release, Hood ................................................. 121
Reminder, Seat Belt ........................................ 252
Remote Control
Starting System .............................................41
Remote Keyless Entry ........................................35
Arm The Alarm .............................................. 45
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 45
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............37
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 230
Remote Start
Exit (PHEV) .....................................................43
Remote Start (Gas) ............................................ 41
Remote Start (PHEV) ......................................... 43
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................... 41
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ........................................................ 42
Uconnect Settings .........................................42
Remote Starting System .............................
41, 43
Removable Doors ........................................
49, 52
Front .............................................................. 49
Rear ............................................................... 52
Removable Top ................................................ 113
Replacement Bulbs .........................................335
Replacement Keys ............................................. 37
Replacement Tires ...........................................347
Restraints, Child .............................................. 269
Restraints, Head ................................................ 67
Roll Over Warning .................................................9
Roof Type Carrier ............................................. 124
Rotation, Tires ..................................................351
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..........................280
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................... 281
Safety Information, Tire ...................................338
Safety Tips ....................................................... 280
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................................281
Schedule, Maintenance .................................. 297
Seat Belt Reminder ......................................... 142
Seat Belts ............................................... 252, 280
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................... 255
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....255
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ...................................................255
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 256
Child Restraints .......................................... 269
Extender ......................................................256
Front Seat .......................................... 252–254
Inspection ................................................... 280
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 254
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 255
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................... 253
Operating Instructions ............................... 254
Pregnant Women ........................................256
Pretensioners ............................................. 256
Rear Seat .................................................... 253
Reminder .................................................... 252
Seat Belt Extender ......................................256
Seat Belt Pretensioner ...............................256
Untwisting Procedure .................................255
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................. 360
Seats ...................................................................61
Adjustment ............................................. 61, 62
Easy Entry ......................................................63
Fold And Tumble Rear ..................................
65
Heated ...........................................................67
Height Adjustment ........................................ 62
Lumbar Adjustment ...................................... 61
Power ............................................................. 61
Rear Folding .................................................. 61
Tilting ............................................................. 61
Security Alarm ...........................................45, 142
Arm The System ............................................45
Disarm The System .......................................45
Selec - Speed Control ...................................... 241
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ................... 366
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................... 37
378
Sentry Key Replacement ................................... 37
Service Assistance .......................................... 369
Service Contract .............................................. 370
Service Manuals ..............................................370
Settings ............................................................ 211
Shifting ............................................................. 157
Automatic Transmission .................... 157, 158
Manual Transmission .................................155
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .........................................204
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .........................................204
Shoulder Belts ................................................. 253
Side Step Removal .......................................... 205
Signals, Turn ...................................147, 281, 337
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ..............................350
Snow Tires ....................................................... 348
Soft Top ........................................................89, 96
Soft Top Windows .............................................. 96
Spare Tires .....................................287, 348, 349
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ............................................366
Oil ................................................................ 366
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .................................................181
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................. 184
Cancel ......................................................... 181
Resume ....................................................... 181
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....................... 181
Starting ................................................... 150, 153
Automatic Transmission .............................
150
Button ............................................................38
Cold Weather .............................................. 153
Engine Fails To Start .................................. 152
Manual Transmission .................................150
Remote .......................................................... 41
Starting And Operating ...........................150, 153
Starting Procedures ............................... 150, 153
Steering
Power ...........................................................175
Tilt Column .................................................... 60
Wheel, Heated .............................................. 60
Wheel, Tilt ......................................................60
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................... 230
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ............................................................230
Stop/Start ................................................176, 178
Storage ............................................... 83,
96, 115
Behind the Seat ............................................ 83
Storage, Vehicle ......................................353, 354
Storing Your Vehicle ............................... 353, 354
Sun Roof .......................................................... 113
Sunrider® For Hard Top .................................. 111
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic .................................................... 167
Sway Control, Trailer ........................................ 242
Swing Gate, Rear .............................................122
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................................ 306
System, Remote Starting ...................................41
T
Telescoping Steering Column ........................... 60
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..............81
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...................................123
Tilt Steering Column .......................................... 60
Tire And Loading Information Placard ............342
Tire Markings ...................................................338
Tire Safety Information ....................................338
Tires .......................................281, 344, 348, 352
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................................347
Air Pressure ................................................ 344
Chains ......................................................... 350
Changing ..................................................... 286
Compact Spare ...........................................348
General Information ..........................344, 348
High Speed ................................................. 345
Inflation Pressure ....................................... 345
Life Of Tires ................................................. 347
Load Capacity .................................... 342, 343
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 144, 248
Quality Grading ........................................... 352
Radial .......................................................... 346
Replacement ...............................................347
Rotation .......................................................351
Safety ................................................. 338, 344
Sizes ............................................................339
Snow Tires .................................................. 348
Spare Tires ................................287, 348, 349
Spinning ...................................................... 346
Tread Wear Indicators ................................ 346
379
11
Wheel Nut Torque .......................................362
To Open Hood .................................................. 121
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ........................ 200
Top
Dual ............................................................... 89
Hard ...............................................................89
Power Sliding .............................................. 113
Removable .................................................... 89
Soft ................................................................ 89
Tow Hooks
Emergency .................................................. 295
Towing ............................................ 199, 200, 294
Disabled Vehicle .........................................
294
Recreational ............................................... 203
Weight ......................................................... 200
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..........................203
Trac-Lok
Rear Axle ..................................................... 165
Traction Control ................................................242
Trail Recording ................................................. 232
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................... 242
Trailer Towing ................................................... 199
Hitches ........................................................ 200
Minimum Requirements ............................ 201
Trailer And Tongue Weight ......................... 200
Wiring .......................................................... 202
Trailer Towing Guide ........................................ 200
Trailer Weight ...................................................200
Transfer Case ................................................... 317
Fluid .............................................................367
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ..............161, 163
Maintenance ............................................... 317
Transmission ....................................................158
Automatic ........................................... 158, 317
Fluid .............................................................367
Maintenance ............................................... 317
Manual ........................................................ 155
Shifting ........................................................ 157
Transporting Pets ............................................ 280
Tread Wear Indicators ..................................... 346
Turn Signals .............................................147, 337
U
UCI Connector .................................................... 84
Uconnect Settings ........................................... 211
Customer Programmable Features .... 46, 211
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 46
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............................352
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector ...........................................................84
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....................255
USB .....................................................................84
USB Port ............................................................. 84
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................... 70
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............... 362
Vehicle Loading ...................................... 198, 343
Vehicle Maintenance .......................................306
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .....................10
Vehicle Storage .......................................353, 354
Voice Command .................................................69
Climate .......................................................... 81
Voice Recognition .............................................. 69
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................... 69
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ....................................................143
Warnings, Roll Over ..............................................9
Washers, Windshield .......................................305
Washing Vehicle .............................................. 355
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............................ 349
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .............................349
Winch ............................................................... 169
Accessories ................................................. 170
Operation .................................................... 170
Rigging Techniques .....................................175
Usage .......................................................... 169
Wind Buffeting ................................................... 88
Window Fogging .................................................82
Window Lockout Switch .................................... 88
Window Storage .................................................96
Windows ............................................................. 88
Power .............................................................88
Windshield
Folding .........................................................119
Windshield Defroster .......................................280
Windshield Washers ................................. 78, 305
380
Fluid .............................................................305
Windshield Wiper Blades ................................ 310
Windshield Wipers .............................................
78
Wipers Blade Replacement ............................ 310
Wipers, Rear .......................................................79
381
11
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving
while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use
extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident.
Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the
vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while
driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your
new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional
information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Jeep
®
brand dealer.
First Edition
25_JL_OM_EN_USC
©2024 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
The Jeep app puts the latest in connectivity and convenience in the palm of your hand. The App provides access to your remote vehicle commands
(if properly equipped), service history, My Garage and the Digital Glovebox. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store
and enter the search keyword “Jeep” (U.S. residents only).
SCAN TO DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE OWNER’S
MANUAL, RADIO AND
WARRANTY MANUALS
U.S.
mopar.com/om
owners.mopar.ca
CANADA
